MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Add to my manuals
278 Pages

advertisement

MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide | Manualzz

MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2

Product Reference Guide

MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2

Product Reference Guide

72E-87925-01

Revision A

August 2006

© 2006 by Symbol Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means, without permission in writing from Symbol. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to change without notice.

The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on a licensed basis. Symbol grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Symbol. No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Symbol. The user agrees to maintain Symbol’s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof.

Symbol reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design.

Symbol does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any product, circuit, or application described herein.

No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Symbol Technologies, Inc., intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in Symbol products.

Symbol, Spectrum One, and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies, Inc. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Microsoft, Windows and ActiveSync are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.

Symbol Technologies, Inc.

One Symbol Plaza

Holtsville, New York 11742-1300 http://www.symbol.com

Patents

This product is covered by one or more of the patents listed on the website: www.symbol.com/patents

Table of Contents

About This Guide

Introduction .................................................................................................................... xi

Chapter Descriptions ..................................................................................................... xi

Notational Conventions.................................................................................................. xii

Related Publications ...................................................................................................... xii

Service Information ........................................................................................................ xiii

Symbol Global Customer Interaction Center ........................................................... xiii

Chapter 1: MK2200 Introduction

Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1-1

MK2200 Configurations ................................................................................................ 1-1

MK2200 Parts ............................................................................................................... 1-2

Touch Screen LCD ................................................................................................. 1-2

Speakers and Microphone ...................................................................................... 1-2

Scanner Window ..................................................................................................... 1-2

Function Buttons ..................................................................................................... 1-2

Access Covers ........................................................................................................ 1-2

Antenna ................................................................................................................... 1-2

External Ports ......................................................................................................... 1-5

MK2200 Features ......................................................................................................... 1-6

Programmable Function Buttons ............................................................................ 1-6

Bar Code Scanner .................................................................................................. 1-6

Software .................................................................................................................. 1-6

Touch Screen .......................................................................................................... 1-6

Magnetic Stripe Reader (Optional) ......................................................................... 1-6

Memory ................................................................................................................... 1-6

Connectivity Options ............................................................................................... 1-7

Expansion Card Slot ............................................................................................... 1-7

Power Options ........................................................................................................ 1-7

Mounting Options .................................................................................................... 1-7

Symbol Mobility Developer Kits (SMDKs) ............................................................... 1-7

Bar Code Scanning ....................................................................................................... 1-8

Scanning Modes ..................................................................................................... 1-8

Scanning Guidelines ............................................................................................... 1-9

Cyclone Omnidirectional ......................................................................................... 1-10

Smart Raster ........................................................................................................... 1-10

Specular Reflection ................................................................................................. 1-12

iv MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 2: Installation

Overview ....................................................................................................................... 2-1

Unpacking the MK2200 ................................................................................................ 2-1

Installation Overview ..................................................................................................... 2-2

MK2200 Mounting ......................................................................................................... 2-2

MK2200 Wall Mounting Options ............................................................................. 2-3

Pole Mounting ......................................................................................................... 2-6

Connecting the MK2200 ............................................................................................... 2-7

AC Power Supply ................................................................................................... 2-7

Wired Ethernet Connection ..................................................................................... 2-7

Wired RS-485 Setup ............................................................................................... 2-11

Wired RS-232 Setup ............................................................................................... 2-12

Peripherals .................................................................................................................... 2-14

COM Port ................................................................................................................ 2-14

Connector Pin-Outs ...................................................................................................... 2-15

Ethernet / Bias-T Port Connections ........................................................................ 2-15

RS-485 Port Connections ....................................................................................... 2-16

Scanner/Printer (RS-232) Port Connections ........................................................... 2-16

Magnetic Stripe Reader (MSR) Mounting ..................................................................... 2-17

Installing/Removing the RF Card .................................................................................. 2-21

Chapter 3: Configuration

Overview ....................................................................................................................... 3-1

Remote Configuration using Symbol Remote Device Manager .............................. 3-1

Local Configuration ................................................................................................. 3-1

Updating the Device Configuration File .................................................................. 3-2

Downloading the Configuration File to the MK2200 ................................................ 3-3

Rebooting the MK2200 ........................................................................................... 3-4

System Menu ................................................................................................................ 3-5

Setting Defaults Using the System Menu ............................................................... 3-5

Default Parameters ....................................................................................................... 3-6

Configuration File Information ................................................................................. 3-6

Applications ............................................................................................................. 3-6

Communications ..................................................................................................... 3-8

System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-10

Update .................................................................................................................... 3-23

Control Panel Configuration Parameters ...................................................................... 3-24

Backlight Settings ................................................................................................... 3-24

Button Definitions .................................................................................................... 3-25

Date and Time ........................................................................................................ 3-25

Inactivity Manager ................................................................................................... 3-26

Gate Keeper (Password Protection) ....................................................................... 3-27

Volume and Sounds ................................................................................................ 3-27

Stylus Settings/Touch Screen Calibration ............................................................... 3-28

Regional Settings .................................................................................................... 3-30

Memory Allocation .................................................................................................. 3-31

Table of Contents

Chapter 4: Remote Device Manager

Overview ....................................................................................................................... 4-1

Generating Configuration Files ..................................................................................... 4-1

Performing Discovery (Detection) of Devices on a Network ......................................... 4-2

Automated Staging/Configuring/Provisioning of Networked Devices ........................... 4-2

Remote Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 4-2

Remotely Initiating Select Device Functionality ............................................................ 4-2

Installing the Symbol Remote Device Manager ............................................................ 4-3

Symbol Remote Device Manager Main Screen ............................................................ 4-5

Symbol Remote Device Manager Menus ................................................................ 4-5

Symbol Remote Device Manager Toolbar .............................................................. 4-7

Row Colors .............................................................................................................. 4-8

State Icons .............................................................................................................. 4-8

Filtering Parameters ............................................................................................... 4-9

Electronic Serial Number ........................................................................................ 4-10

Creating a Configuration File ........................................................................................ 4-11

Modifying an Existing Configuration File ....................................................................... 4-12

Retrieving and Modifying a Configuration File from an MK2200 ............................. 4-12

Cloning an MK2200 Configuration File to Multiple MK2200s ........................................ 4-12

Downloading the Configuration File to the MK2200 Using the RDM ...................... 4-13

Setting RDM Options .................................................................................................... 4-13

Monitoring MK2200s on a Network ............................................................................... 4-15

Device Information - Info Tab: Detected Device Information .................................. 4-16

Device Information - Software Tab: Version Information ........................................ 4-17

Device Information - Storage Tab: Memory Availability and Usage ........................ 4-18

Device Information - Partitions Tab ......................................................................... 4-19

Setting a Static IP Address ........................................................................................... 4-20

Managing Static IP Addresses ...................................................................................... 4-20

Adding Static IP Addresses ..................................................................................... 4-21

Modifying Static IP Addresses ................................................................................ 4-22

Deleting Static IP Addresses ................................................................................... 4-23

DHCP Configuration ..................................................................................................... 4-24

Enabling DHCP ....................................................................................................... 4-24

Custom DHCP Options ........................................................................................... 4-26

Updating the RDM on the Host Computer .................................................................... 4-27

Restoring Configuration Parameter Defaults ................................................................ 4-27

Data Entry Formats ....................................................................................................... 4-27

v

Chapter 5: Transferring Files to the MK2200

Overview ....................................................................................................................... 5-1

ActiveSync .................................................................................................................... 5-1

Installing ActiveSync ............................................................................................... 5-1

Connecting the MK2200 to the Host Computer ...................................................... 5-2

Chapter 6: Web Kiosk Software Suite

Overview ....................................................................................................................... 6-1

Web Kiosk Software Suite Features ............................................................................. 6-1

vi MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Web Kiosk Software Suite ............................................................................................ 6-2

Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes .................................................................... 6-2

Installing the Web Kiosk Software Suite ................................................................ 6-2

Disabling and Restoring the Web Kiosk Software Suite ......................................... 6-4

Starting and Exiting the Web Kiosk Software Suite ................................................ 6-4

Web Kiosk Software Suite Structure ............................................................................. 6-4

Customer Application Screens ..................................................................................... 6-5

Main Menu Bar ........................................................................................................ 6-5

Scanning Bar Codes ............................................................................................... 6-5

Attract Mode ............................................................................................................ 6-6

Price Verification ..................................................................................................... 6-7

CD Listening Station ............................................................................................... 6-7

Price Verification Menu Bar .................................................................................... 6-8

Printing ................................................................................................................... 6-8

Loyalty Program ...................................................................................................... 6-10

Guided Selling Tool (Select Ink Cartridge) .............................................................. 6-11

KichenAid Mixer ...................................................................................................... 6-13

Gift Registry ............................................................................................................ 6-14

Store Operations Screen .............................................................................................. 6-16

Work Schedule Screen ........................................................................................... 6-17

Calculator ................................................................................................................ 6-17

In-Store Messaging ................................................................................................. 6-18

Web KSS Source Code Index ...................................................................................... 6-23

Screen Layout ......................................................................................................... 6-23

Printing .................................................................................................................... 6-23

Scan Engine ............................................................................................................ 6-24

Magstripe Reader ................................................................................................... 6-24

Four Physical Buttons ............................................................................................. 6-24

Multi-Media Content ................................................................................................ 6-24

Advertising .............................................................................................................. 6-25

Device Startup ........................................................................................................ 6-25

Application Version Tracking .................................................................................. 6-25

Network Down - Redirect to an Internal Error Page ................................................ 6-25

Chapter 7: C# Kiosk Software Suite

Overview ....................................................................................................................... 7-1

C# Kiosk Software Suite Features ................................................................................ 7-1

Installing the C# Kiosk Software Suite ......................................................................... 7-2

Loading .NET Compact Framework onto an MK Device ........................................ 7-2

Install the C# KSS onto the MK2200 ...................................................................... 7-3

Automated Launching of the C# KSS ........................................................................... 7-3

Auto-loading the .NET Compact Framework at Boot-up Sequence ....................... 7-3

Auto Launching the C# KSS at Power Up .............................................................. 7-4

C# Kiosk Software Suite Structure ............................................................................... 7-4

Customer Application Screens ..................................................................................... 7-5

Main Menu Bar ........................................................................................................ 7-5

Scanning Bar Codes ............................................................................................... 7-5

Attract Mode ............................................................................................................ 7-6

Table of Contents vii

Price Verification ..................................................................................................... 7-7

Loyalty Program ...................................................................................................... 7-7

Guided Selling Tool (Fitting Guide) ......................................................................... 7-8

CD Listening Station ............................................................................................... 7-8

Store Operations Screen .............................................................................................. 7-9

In-Store Messaging ................................................................................................. 7-9

C# KSS Source Code Index ......................................................................................... 7-12

Scan Engine Control ............................................................................................... 7-12

Screen Layout ......................................................................................................... 7-12

Button Control ......................................................................................................... 7-13

Version Tracking ..................................................................................................... 7-13

Video Playback ....................................................................................................... 7-13

Automating Launch of the C# KSS ......................................................................... 7-13

Printing on a Zebra QL320 Printer .......................................................................... 7-13

Chapter 8: System Features

Overview ....................................................................................................................... 8-1

Security Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-2

Network Security ........................................................................................................... 8-2

SNMP-Based Remote Monitoring ................................................................................. 8-3

List of Reported Software Component Versions ..................................................... 8-3

User Application Version Reporting ........................................................................ 8-4

Actions - Custom MIB ............................................................................................. 8-5

RegMerge and CopyFiles ............................................................................................. 8-6

RegMerge.dll ........................................................................................................... 8-6

CopyFiles ................................................................................................................ 8-7

Accessing the Windows® CE Desktop ......................................................................... 8-7

Password Protection (Gate Keeper) ............................................................................. 8-7

Remapping Buttons ...................................................................................................... 8-8

Button Remapping - Keycode Values ..................................................................... 8-9

Network Time Update: SNTP Client ............................................................................. 8-10

Memory Management ................................................................................................... 8-10

Flash: Nonvolatile (Persistent) Memory .................................................................. 8-10

RAM: Volatile (Non-Persistent) Memory ................................................................. 8-11

FTP Server .................................................................................................................... 8-11

FTP Server Registry Parameters ............................................................................ 8-11

Inactivity Application (Screen Saver) ............................................................................ 8-12

SimpleSaver ............................................................................................................ 8-12

SlideShow ............................................................................................................... 8-12

Browser Applications - Hiding Toolbars ........................................................................ 8-13

Browser Applications - Handling Network Disconnects ................................................ 8-14

Configuring Error Page Redirection .............................................................................. 8-14

Loading Additional Fonts on the MK2200 ..................................................................... 8-15

Using Additional Fonts in Native Applications ......................................................... 8-15

Using Additional Fonts in Managed Applications .................................................... 8-15

Using Additional Fonts in Browser Applications ...................................................... 8-16

Things to Consider when Using Additional Fonts ................................................... 8-16

Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard) ...................................................................................... 8-17

viii MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Microsoft WordPad ....................................................................................................... 8-18

Windows Media Player ................................................................................................. 8-19

Internet Explorer ........................................................................................................... 8-19

Browsing the Web ................................................................................................... 8-20

Printer Object Test ........................................................................................................ 8-21

MSR Object Test .......................................................................................................... 8-22

Scanner Object Test ..................................................................................................... 8-23

Audio Object Test ......................................................................................................... 8-24

MicroKiosk Object Test ................................................................................................. 8-25

Chapter 9: Software Development Environments

Overview ....................................................................................................................... 9-1

Symbol Mobility Developer Kits (SMDKs) ..................................................................... 9-1

Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for C .......................................................... 9-1

Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for the Web ............................................... 9-2

PocketBrowser v2.01 for the Web .......................................................................... 9-3

Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for .NET .................................................... 9-3

Appendix A: Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications ............................................................................................... A-1

Appendix B: RF Network Configuration

Overview ....................................................................................................................... B-1

Automated Launch of Aegis Client ............................................................................... B-1

Aegis Client ................................................................................................................... B-2

Persisting Aegis Settings ........................................................................................ B-2

Mobile Companion (11 Mbps Radio) ............................................................................ B-3

Configuring Mobile Companion .................................................................................... B-5

Configuring the Default Profile ................................................................................ B-5

Editing Profiles ........................................................................................................ B-6

Persisting Mobile Companion Settings ................................................................... B-15

Find WLANs .................................................................................................................. B-16

Options ......................................................................................................................... B-20

Appendix C: Rapid Deployment Client

Overview ....................................................................................................................... C-1

Rapid Deployment Window .......................................................................................... C-1

Scanning RD Bar Codes ............................................................................................... C-3

Appendix D: Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

Overview ....................................................................................................................... D-1

Wide Screen TV ............................................................................................................ D-1

DVD Player ................................................................................................................... D-2

White Correction Fluid .................................................................................................. D-2

Table of Contents

Glue Stick ...................................................................................................................... D-3

Transparent Tape ......................................................................................................... D-3

Standard Staples .......................................................................................................... D-4

Tylenol .......................................................................................................................... D-4

Rolaids .......................................................................................................................... D-5

CD ................................................................................................................................. D-5

Color Printer - Ink Cartridge .......................................................................................... D-6

KichenAid Mixer ............................................................................................................ D-6

Employee Badge ........................................................................................................... D-7

Loyalty Card .................................................................................................................. D-7

2D Bar Code (PDF417) ................................................................................................. D-8

ix

Appendix E: C# Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

Overview ....................................................................................................................... E-1

Pants UPC-A ................................................................................................................. E-1

Transparent Tape ......................................................................................................... E-2

CD ................................................................................................................................. E-2

Employee Badge ........................................................................................................... E-3

Loyalty Card .................................................................................................................. E-3

Appendix F: Terminal Configuration Manager

Overview ....................................................................................................................... F-1

Starting Terminal Configuration Manager ..................................................................... F-2

Defining Script Properties ............................................................................................. F-4

Creating the Script for the Hex Image ........................................................................... F-5

Open a New or Existing Script ................................................................................ F-5

Copying Components to the Script ......................................................................... F-5

Saving the Script ..................................................................................................... F-6

Building the Image ........................................................................................................ F-7

Sending the Hex Image ................................................................................................ F-8

Saving the Script ..................................................................................................... F-8

TCM Error Messages .............................................................................................. F-8

Creating a Splash Screen ............................................................................................. F-10

Creating a Splash Screen on Color Terminals ........................................................ F-10

Appendix G: OS Upgrade Procedures

Overview ....................................................................................................................... G-1

Upgrade Requirements ................................................................................................. G-1

Hardware Requirements ......................................................................................... G-1

Software Requirements ........................................................................................... G-2

Procedural Requirements ....................................................................................... G-2

IPL Menu Navigation ..................................................................................................... G-3

OS Upgrade .................................................................................................................. G-4

Monitor Upgrade .................................................................................................... G-4

Partition Table Upgrade .......................................................................................... G-6

Command File Upgrade .......................................................................................... G-7

x MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Calibrating the Screen ........................................................................................... G-10

Update Corona Scanner Engine Firmware ............................................................. G-11

Appendix H: Troubleshooting

Overview ....................................................................................................................... H-1

Troubleshooting Notes ............................................................................................ H-1

Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................... H-1

OS Upgrade Troubleshooting ................................................................................. H-5

MK2200 Version Information .................................................................................. H-6

Appendix I: Setting Scanner Parameters

Overview ....................................................................................................................... I-1

Enabling and Disabling Symbologies ........................................................................... I-1

C API ....................................................................................................................... I-1

ActiveX API (Browser Applications) ........................................................................ I-1

Default Table ................................................................................................................ I-1

Set Default Parameters ................................................................................................ I-6

Glossary

Index

Quick Startup Instructions

About This Guide

About This Guide

Introduction

The

MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

provides information on installing, operating, and programming the MK2200.

NOTE

Unless otherwise noted, the term MK2200 refers to all configurations of the device.

Chapter Descriptions

Following are brief descriptions of each chapter in this guide.

Chapter 1, MK2200 Introduction ,

provides an overview of the MK2200 that includes parts of the MK2200, features, and scanning modes.

Chapter 2, Installation

,

describes the hardware setup and installation of the MK2200.

Chapter 3, Configuration

,

describes the configuration parameters of the MK2200.

Chapter 4, Remote Device Manager , provides information about the Remote Device Manager (RDM).

Chapter 5, Transferring Files to the MK2200 , describes how to use Microsoft

®

ActiveSync for communication between the MK2200 and a host computer.

Chapter 6, Web Kiosk Software Suite ,

describes the free browser-based application available for download.

Chapter 7, C# Kiosk Software Suite , describes the free C# application available for download.

Chapter 8, System Features

, describes the wide range of capabilities used to support independent application development on the MK2200.

Chapter 9, Software Development Environments

, describes the software development environments.

Appendix A, Technical Specifications

, provides technical information about the MK2200.

Appendix B, RF Network Configuration

,

describes how to configure the Spectrum24 wireless connection.

Appendix C, Rapid Deployment Client , describes the Rapid Deployment Client and how it facilitates

software downloads to the MK2200 from a Mobility Services Platform (MSP) Console’s FTP server.

Appendix D, Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

, provides sample bar codes used with the Web Kiosk

Software Suite.

xii MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Appendix E, C# Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

, provides sample bar codes used with the C# Kiosk

Software Suite.

Appendix F, Terminal Configuration Manager , provides an overview of the Terminal Configuration

Manager (TCM), used to specify and load files into the MK2200 flash memory using the MK2200 Initial

Program Loader (IPL).

Appendix G, OS Upgrade Procedures

, provides instructions on using IPL mode to upgrade flash partitions.

Appendix H, Troubleshooting

, provides troubleshooting procedures for correcting problems encountered with the MK2200.

Appendix I, Setting Scanner Parameters

, lists the defaults for all scanning parameters.

Glossary

provides definitions of technical terms used in this document.

Notational Conventions

This document uses these conventions:

“User” refers to anyone using an application on the terminal.

“Device” refers to the MK2200.

Italics

are used to highlight specific items in the general text, and to identify chapters and sections in this and related documents. It also identifies names of windows, menus, menu items, and fields within windows.

Bold

identifies buttons to be tapped or clicked.

Bullets (•) indicate:

-

lists of alternatives or action items.

-

lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential.

• Numbered lists indicate a set of sequential steps, i.e., those that describe step-by-step procedures.

Related Publications

Following is a list of documents that provide additional information about configuring the MK2200:

MK1200/MK2200 Quick Reference Guide

, p/n 72-88687-xx

MK2000 PSDK (Platform Software Development Kit)

MK2000 SMDK (Symbol Mobility Developer Kit) for C

MK2000 SMDK (Symbol Mobility Developer Kit) for .NET

MK2000 SMDK (Symbol Mobility Developer Kit) for .WEB

MSR Magnetic Stripe Reader Quick Reference Guide

, p/n 72-54435-xx

AirBeam Package Builder Product Reference Guide

, p/n 72-55769-xx.

About This Guide xiii

• Aegis documentation, available at http://www.mtghouse.com/

-

Aegis Client for Windows CE .NET Registry Definitions Version 2.1

-

Aegis Client for Windows CE .NET & PPC User Guide Version 2.1

Service Information

For equipment problems, contact the Symbol Global Customer Interaction Center. Before calling, have the model number and serial number at hand.

Call the Global Customer Interaction Center from a phone near the equipment so that the service person can try to talk you through the problem. If the equipment is found to be working properly and the problem is symbol readability, the Center will request samples of your bar codes for analysis at our plant.

If the problem cannot be solved over the phone, you may need to return the equipment for servicing. If that is necessary, specific directions will be provided.

Symbol Global Customer Interaction Center

For service information, warranty information or technical assistance contact or call the Symbol Global

Customer Interaction Center. For contact information, go to: www.symbol.com/contactsupport .

If the Symbol product was purchased from a Symbol Business Partner, contact that Business Partner for service.

For the latest version of this guide go to: http://www.symbol.com/manuals .

xiv MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 1

Chapter 1

Chapter 1

MK2200 Introduction

MK2200 Introduction

Overview

The MK2200 MicroKiosk provides retail consumers access to data critical to making an informed purchasing decision. The MK2200 verifies prices on bar coded merchandise and obtains up-to-the-minute information on in-store promotions. Its large, easy-to-read display can be used as an electronic billboard for instant in-store merchandising and multimedia presentations to promote seasonal sales and upcoming events. The touch screen and programmable function buttons enhance in-store applications and allow customer interaction.

MK2200 Configurations

The MK2200 MicroKiosk is available in two configurations:

MK2200-0N0SFKBWT0R:

Wired Ethernet, touch screen, 32 MB / 64 MB

MK2250-0N0SFKBWTWR:

802.11b, touch screen, 32 MB / 64 MB; no Ethernet support/chip is present

1 - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

MK2200 Parts

MK2200 parts include:

Touch screen

Speakers and microphone

Scanner window

Function buttons

Access covers

External ports.

See

Figure 1-1 on page 1-3

,

Figure 1-2 on page 1-4

, and

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

for illustrations.

Touch Screen LCD

The full color 6.4 inch (16.26 cm) diagonal full VGA active matrix LCD (640 X 480 pixels) is ideal for presenting text, graphics, and video. The touch screen accommodates greater user interaction and enhances custom designed applications.

Speakers and Microphone

The MK2200 speakers are ideal for multimedia applications, and its built-in front-mounted microphone can be used for voice recording.

Scanner Window

The scanner window protects the scan engine.

Function Buttons

The MK2200 has four programmable function buttons (see

Figure 1-1 on page 1-3

) identified

A

,

B

,

C

, and

D

(from left to right) for reference purposes in this document, and are not labeled on the MK2200. Program these buttons for various tasks such as navigating through an application and making decisions when prompted. See

Remapping Buttons on page 8-8

for instructions on setting the button values.

Access Covers

The three access covers on the back of the MK2200 cover expansion card slots. Expansion card slot access is intended for development or maintenance purposes only.

Antenna

The RF antenna on wireless units is located toward the front of the device, above the display. Only the RF cable, which plugs into the radio card, is accessible through the top access cover of the back housing.

Function

Button (A)

Function

Button (B)

Microphone

Figure 1-1

MK2200 Front View

MK2200 Introduction 1 - 3

Touch

Screen

Function

Button (D)

Function

Button (C)

Speakers (2)

Scanner

Window

1 - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

PCMCIA Access Cover*

Keyhole

Mounts (4)

Vertical

Cable Run

Accessory

Bay

Connections

Access

Cover*

Figure 1-2

MK2200 Rear View

CAUTION

When removing an access cover, follow proper (Electro-Static Discharge) ESD precautions to avoid damaging sensitive components. These precautions include, but are not limited to, working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the operator is properly grounded. Failure to apply proper ESD precautions can damage the

MK2200 and void the warranty.

Ethernet/

Bias-T

MK2200 Introduction 1 - 5

Power

Headphones Jack

Scanner/

Printer

(RS-232)

RS 485

Figure 1-3

MK2200 Bottom (Connectors) View

External Ports

The MK2200 has the following external ports:

RS485

Ethernet / Bias-T (Power-over-Ethernet)

Power

Headphones

Scanner/printer (RS-232, powered).

RS-485

The RS-485 (10-conductor RJ-45 connection) half-duplex interface is also called the Multidrop LAN since it can connect several MK2200s in a LAN network environment. See

Figure 2-9 on page 2-13

. These devices

are all connected to a single pair wire (i.e., transmit and receive share the same two wires).

Ethernet/Bias-T

Wired Ethernet: Power through AC Outlet

The Ethernet / Bias-T (10-conductor RJ-45) port accommodates Ethernet data connection. The MK2200 receives power through the Symbol approved power supply.

Wired Ethernet: Power through Power-over-Ethernet

The MK2200 supports Power-over-Ethernet (POE), Symbol Technologies' proprietary

Bias-T functionality. An Ethernet (10/100Base-T) cable connected to the Ethernet/Bias-T port provides both data communication and power to the MK2200.

1 - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Power Port

A Symbol power supply connects to the power port (2.0 mm barrel jack connector) on the MK2200. For more information, see

Connecting the MK2200 on page 2-7

and

Technical Specifications on page A-1

.

Headphones Jack

This standard 3.5 mm headphone connection is compatible with headphones used on many portable audio products (MP3 players). Headphones that do not protrude into the ear are recommended. Connecting headphones disables the speakers.

Scanner/Printer (RS-232)

Use the powered (5V/500mA) Scanner/Printer (RS-232) port (RJ-45 jack, 10 conductor) for serial communication with a host or to connect an external device such as a decoded scanner or portable printer.

Confirm the cable pin-outs before attaching the cable. See

Scanner/Printer (RS-232) Port Connections on page 2-16

for cable pin-outs.

MK2200 Features

Programmable Function Buttons

The MK2200 has four function buttons you can program to perform various tasks such as navigation through an application or choosing between various options. See

Figure 1-1 on page 1-3

.

Bar Code Scanner

The omni-directional scan pattern decodes all traditional 1D bar codes (including RSS bar code type), and

Smart Raster mode decodes 2D symbologies such as PDF417. See

Bar Code Scanning on page 1-8

.

Software

Standard well-supported operating system and development tools ease application development for the

Microsoft

®

Windows

®

CE .NET operating system: Embedded Visual C/C++ 4.0, Visual Studio.NET, Internet

Explorer 6.0, C#, VisualBasic.NET, and Windows CE Media Player.

Touch Screen

The touch screen provides user interaction and enhances the capabilities of custom applications.

Magnetic Stripe Reader (Optional)

An optional three-track Magnetic Stripe Reader (MSR) module attaches to the MK2200 and adds the ability to read and process loyalty card and credit card transactions.

Memory

The MK2200 standard system configuration contains 64 MB flash/32 MB DRAM. The flash memory is non-volatile and stores the system firmware, user applications, and data.

MK2200 Introduction 1 - 7

Connectivity Options

MK2200 connectivity options include wired 10/100 Mbps Ethernet or wireless 802.11 Mbps. Common ports to both the wired and RF configuration include Printer/Scanner (RS-232) and RS-485.

Expansion Card Slot

The MK2200 contains one Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA/PC Card) expansion slot.

Power Options

To supply power, use the standard Symbol approved power supply or the Symbol proprietary

Power-Over-Ethernet (POE).

Mounting Options

You can mount the MK2200 on a wall or pole. See

MK2200 Mounting on page 2-2

. Alternatively, use a

commercially-available bracket or stand that conforms to the 100 mm Video Electronics Standards Association

(VESA) Flat Panel Monitor Physical Mounting Interface (FPMPMI™) mounting standards.

Symbol Mobility Developer Kits (SMDKs)

The following developer kits are available for the MK2200:

SMDK for C (see

Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for C on page 9-1

) for developing native C/C++

applications

SMDK for the Web (see

Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for the Web on page 9-2

) for developing

browser-based applications

PocketBrowser v2.01 support (see

PocketBrowser v2.01 for the Web on page 9-3

) for web development

SMDK for .NET (see

Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for .NET on page 9-3

) for developing managed .NET applications in C# or VB.NET.

1 - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Bar Code Scanning

The MK2200 decodes any traditional retail or PDF417 bar code presented in its field of view.

Scanning Modes

Table 1-1

describes the MK2200 scan modes.

Table 1-1

Common Scan Modes

Scan Mode Description

Cyclone

Omnidirectional

1D Scan Pattern

(recommended)

Always Raster

Scan Pattern

A highly efficient scan pattern which decodes

1D and EAN/UCC reduced space symbologies in any orientation.

Note: In this mode, the

MK2200 does not decode 2D bar codes like

PDF417.

Directly opens the laser to a full sized Raster pattern. Decodes 1D and

PDF417.

Scan Pattern

Smart Raster

Scan Pattern

Creates a single scan line which opens vertically for PDF417 symbols using the Smart

Raster feature. This feature autodetects the type of bar code presented and adjusts its pattern accordingly. This provides optimal performance on 1D,

PDF417, and EAN/UCC.

MK2200 Introduction 1 - 9

Scanning Guidelines

When scanning a bar code:

Hold the bar code below the scan window at an approximately 45 o

angle.

Hold the bar code at an angle which does not cause specular reflection (see

Specular Reflection on page

1-12

).

Hold the bar code close for small bar codes and farther away for large bar codes.

Figure 1-4

Scanning with the MK2200

1 - 10 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Cyclone Omnidirectional

In Cyclone Omnidirectional mode the scan pattern decodes standard 1-dimensional symbologies in any orientation. This mode cannot be used to decode 2D bar codes like PDF417.

Figure 1-5

Cyclone Omnidirectional Pattern

Smart Raster

In Smart Raster mode, a single scan line pattern appears that decodes a standard bar code. If a 2D bar code is presented, the scanning pattern opens up to a full, optimized raster pattern.

Single Scan Line Pattern

Open Raster Pattern

Horizontal Displacement (X - Axis)

Figure 1-6

Smart Raster Scanning Pattern

MK2200 Introduction 1 - 11

The raster pattern must cover the top and bottom of a 2D symbol. If not, pull the bar code further away until the pattern completely covers the bar code. Make sure the scan pattern extends

at least three quarters of an inch

beyond the edges of the bar code.

3/4”

3/4”

Figure 1-7

Raster Pattern Expanded Over PDF417 Bar Code

If the vertical scan pattern is not high enough to cover a “tall” PDF417 symbol, move the bar code slowly down toward the bottom of the scan beam, keeping the beam horizontal to the rows, then slowly back up to the top.

Alternatively, move the bar code further away from the scanner until the scan pattern covers a larger portion of the bar code in the vertical direction.

Figure 1-8

Moving Scan Pattern Up and Down on “Tall” PDF417 Bar Code

The scan beam does not have to be

perfectly

parallel with the top and bottom of the symbol (up to a 4

o

tilt is permitted).

Ensure the symbol is in good condition.

1 - 12 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Specular Reflection

When laser beams reflect

directly

back into the scanner from the bar code, they can “blind” the scanner and make decoding difficult. This phenomenon is called specular reflection.

To avoid this, scan the bar code so that the beam does not bounce

directly

back. But do not scan at too oblique an angle; the scanner needs to collect scattered reflections from the scan to make a successful decode.

Practice quickly shows what tolerances to work within.

Side Views

Specular reflection.

Reflected beam is within specular dead zone and prevents decode.

No specular reflection.

Decode can occur.

30

°

Ba r C od e

Ba r C od e

Tilt Bar Code At Slight Angle (Up to 30°)

Figure 1-9

Avoiding Specular Reflection

When scanning a 1D bar code, there is only a small specular dead zone to avoid (+ 2 o

from the direct laser beam). The specular dead zone is larger for scanning PDF417 (+ 9 o

from the direct laser beam). However, the scanner is not effective if its beams hit the bar code surface at an angle greater than 30 o

.

Chapter 2

Chapter 2

Chapter 2

Installation

Installation

Overview

This chapter describes MK2200 installation, including:

Unpacking

Installation

-

Mounting

-

Providing power

-

Communication interfaces

-

Installing accessories

-

Peripherals

Connector pin-outs

Optional accessories.

Unpacking the MK2200

Remove the MK2200 from its packing and inspect it for damage. Keep the packing, it is the approved shipping container and should be used if the MK2200 needs to be returned for servicing.

2 - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Installation Overview

To install the MK2200:

1.

Select the mounting method (see

MK2200 Mounting on page 2-2

):

-

Wall Mount

-

Pole Mount

-

Desk Mount.

2.

Select the method of supplying power (see

Connecting the MK2200 on page 2-7

):

-

Symbol AC power supply

-

Power-over-Ethernet (Symbol Byas T).

3.

Select the data communications method (see

Connecting the MK2200 on page 2-7

):

-

Wired Ethernet (10/100 Base-T cable)

-

Wireless Ethernet (11Mb RF)

-

Wired RS-485 (serial cable)

-

Wired Scanner/Printer (RS-232, serial cable).

4.

Select optional peripherals (see

Peripherals on page 2-14

):

-

Printer

-

External hand held scanner.

5.

Configure the MK2200:

-

For configuration see

Chapter 4, Remote Device Manager

,

System Menu on page 3-5

, or

Control

Panel Configuration Parameters on page 3-24

.

-

To access the Windows

®

CE Desktop, see

Accessing the Windows® CE Desktop on page 6-2

.

MK2200 Mounting

If desired, mount the MK2200 on a wall, pole, or counter top using one of the following optional mounting accessories:

Wall Mounts

Pole Mount Kit, see

page 2-6

Installation 2 - 3

(4X) 4 mm x .7 pitch threaded holes

(M4 screw) per VESA flat panel monitor physical mounting interface standard

1.28

1.81

5.00

3.94

1.29

10.74

0.68

7.57

8.92

Notes:

All dimensions provided in inches.

The MK2200 is designed to be used with VESA flat panel monitor physical mounting interface standard mounting brackets or Symbol's keyhole slide-on mounting brackets.

It can also be placed into a flush panel kiosk environment by setting it into an 8.0 x 8.63 opening.

1.4

3.51

Figure 2-1

Mounting Dimensions

MK2200 Wall Mounting Options

Wall mounting options include:

Free wall-mounting template (shipped with the unit)

Wall Mount Kit (optional)

Recessing the MK2200 into a MicroKiosk or wall (see page 2-5

) (optional).

Using the Wall Mount Kit

1.

Determine the MK2200 mounting location.

2.

Follow the instructions and use the template provided with the MK2200. Secure the Connector/Port Cover to the wall using four screws (not provided) appropriate for the wall material.

3.

Connect the cables to the MK2200 (see

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

) and ensure the cables are routed and

secured correctly (see

Figure 1-4 on page 1-9

). Cables incorrectly mounted or secured can become

pinched when the MK2200 is attached to the Connector/Port Cover.

2 - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

4.

To install the Connector/Port Cover, place the keyholes on the back housing over the shoulder head bolts protruding from the plate and slide the MK2200 to the left and down to secure in place. See

Wall Mounting

Kit on page 2-4

and

Mounting Directions on page 2-4

.

5.

Screw one 8-32 pan head screw (lock screw) into the Connector/Port Cover tab (located at the top left corner). Hand tighten the screw or for additional security use a nylon locknut (not included) to prevent removal of the MK2200.

6.

Proceed to

Connecting the MK2200 on page 2-7

.

Lock Screw

Connector/Port

Cover Tab

Shoulder

Head Bolts (4)

Connector/Port Cover

Figure 2-2

Wall Mounting Kit

Move to the left first

Move down second

Figure 2-3

Mounting Directions

Installation 2 - 5

Vertical Cable Run

Figure 2-4

Cable Routing

Recessed Wall/Kiosk Mounting

To recess the MK2200:

1.

Cut an opening in the wall or MicroKiosk, 8.63" minimum height x 8.0" minimum width.

2.

Place the back housing into the opening, following the instructions in

Using the Wall Mount Kit on page 2-3

.

See

Figure 2-2

and

Figure 2-3 on page 2-4

. Symbol does not provide hardware to support this installation.

NOTE

Recessed mounting may degrade wireless network performance.

2 - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Pole Mounting

The Pole Mounting Kit accommodates poles up to 11.5 inches in diameter. To install the MK2200 using the

Pole Mounting Kit:

1.

Wrap the pole mount straps around the pole and tighten.

2.

Secure the connector port cover to the pole mount bracket using the four shoulder screws.

3.

Connect the cables to the MK2200 (see

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

) and ensure the cables are routed and

secured correctly (see

Figure 2-4 on page 2-5

). Cables incorrectly mounted or secured can become

pinched when the MK2200 is attached to the Connector/Port Cover.

4.

Position the MK2200 keyholes located on the back housing (see

Figure 1-2 on page 1-4

) over the shoulder

head bolts and slide the MK2200 to the left and down to secure in place. See

Wall Mounting Kit on page

2-4

and

Mounting Directions on page 2-4

.

5.

Screw one 8-32 pan head locking screw into the pole mount bracket bottom left tab. See

Figure 2-5 on page 2-6

. Hand tighten the locking screw, or for additional security use a nylon locknut (not included), to

prevent removal of the device.

6.

Proceed to

Connecting the MK2200 on page 2-7

.

Pole Mount Bracket

Locking Screw

Shoulder Screws (4)

Connector/Port Cover

Figure 2-5

Pole Mount Kit

Installation 2 - 7

Connecting the MK2200

The MK2200 communication interfaces include both wired or wireless solutions:

Wired Ethernet (10/100Base-T cable)

-

Power through AC outlet (see

page 2-7

)

-

Power through Power-over-Ethernet (see

page 2-8 )

Wireless Ethernet (11Mb RF)

-

Power through AC outlet (see

page 2-7

)

Wired RS-485 (serial cable) (see page 2-11 )

Wired RS-232 (serial cable) (see page 2-12 ).

To configure communication interfaces, see

Remote Device Manager on page 4-1

. To access the Windows

®

CE Desktop, see

Accessing the Windows® CE Desktop on page 8-7

.

NOTE

Wireless MK22XX devices do not have an Ethernet chip, and so do not support wired

Ethernet communication.

AC Power Supply

The Symbol universal AC power supply connects to the power port on the MK2200 using a 2.0 mm barrel jack.

The power supply has a positive center pin and the outer tab is ground. It is compatible with:

120V 60 Hz (North America)

230V 50 Hz (International excluding Japan)

100V 50/60 Hz (Japan).

Wired Ethernet Connection

With a wired Ethernet connection (10/100Base-T cable), the MK2200 is powered either using the MK2200

Symbol AC power supply, or by Power-over-Ethernet through the Ethernet cable.

Wired Ethernet: Power through AC Outlet

The MK2200 communicates to the host through a 10/100Base-T Ethernet cable and receives power through a

Symbol AC power supply.

1.

Insert the power supply barrel connector into the MK2200 power port. See

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

.

2.

Route the power cable.

3.

Plug the Symbol AC power supply into a wall outlet.

4.

Connect the Ethernet cable to the LAN port on the MK2200. See

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

.

5.

Ensure the Ethernet cable is terminated according to

Table 2-2 on page 2-15 .

6.

Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the host system LAN port.

2 - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Wired Ethernet: Power through POE

The POE installation option allows the MK2200 to communicate and receive power on the same 10/100Base-T

Ethernet cable. See

Figure 2-6 on page 2-9

and

Figure 2-7 on page 2-10

.

CAUTION

Do not use POE in conjunction with an external power supply connected to the power port on the

MK2200. Using two power sources can damage the MK2200 and/or the network.

1.

Connect the Ethernet cable to the MK2200 Ethernet / Bias-T port. See

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

.

2.

Ensure the Ethernet cable is terminated according to

Table 2-2 on page 2-15 .

3.

Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the Bias-T (POE) module.

4.

Connect a patch cable from the Bias-T (POE) module to the host system LAN port.

5.

Connect the DC power supply to the Bias-T module.

Category 5

Patch Cable

Customer Switch / Hub

P/N 50-14001-006R

DC Power

Supply

AP-PSBIAS-TR AP-PSBIAS-TR

DC Power

Supply

P/N 50-14001-006R

Customer

Patch Panel

Category 5

Category 5

Installation 2 - 9

MK2200

MicroKiosk

Figure 2-6

MK2200 Power-Over-Ethernet, Network Connectivity

2 - 10 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Customer Switch / Hub

(Main Computer Room / MDF)

Category 5

Fiber Optic

Cable

Customer

Patch Panel

(Remote Computer

Room / IDF)

P/N 50-14001-006R

DC Power

Supply

AP-PSBIAS-TR AP-PSBIAS-TR

DC Power

Supply

P/N 50-14001-006R

MK2200

MicroKiosk

Figure 2-7

Alternate MK2200 Power-Over-Ethernet, Network Connectivity

Installation 2 - 11

Wired RS-485 Setup

The MK2200 can communicate with a host using a wired RS-485 serial connection, typically using the MK2200

Symbol AC power supply. When installing MK2200s where PCK 9100, PCK 9140, or MK1000 wiring exists, connect that wiring directly to the MK2200.

RS-485 is a two-wire multidrop network: RS-485 signal and RS-485 inverted signal. See

Figure 2-9 on page

2-13

for an illustration of a two-wire network.

Ensure each MK2200 is connected directly to the RS-485 bus with correct polarity (see

Figure 2-8

).

Use wire nuts or connector block

Figure 2-8

Connector Block

In an RS-485 installation, use a cable that meets or exceeds the following specifications:

1 twisted pair 26 AWG (7/34) tinned copper

Twisted pair foil wrapped - 100% coverage

Nominal impedance 120 ohms

Capacitance between twisted pair 10-25 pF per foot

Capacitance between conductors & shield 20-35 pF per foot

DC resistance of each conductor 45 ohms per 1000 feet

DC resistance of sh]ield 10 ohms per 1000 feet.

If the host does not support RS-485, use an RS-232 to RS-485 conversion box, sourced locally and configured per manufacturer instructions. To install the MK2200 with a host that does not support RS-485:

1.

Insert the power supply barrel connector into the MK2200 power port. See

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

.

2.

Route the power cable.

3.

Plug the Symbol AC power supply into a wall outlet.

4.

Connect the conversion box to the host using an RS-232 cable.

5.

Connect the RS-485 cable to the LAN port on the MK2200. See

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

for port locations.

Terminate the cable according to the

RS-485 Port Connections

described in

Table 2-3 .

6.

Plug the other end of the RS-485 cable into the converter box.

2 - 12 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Wired RS-232 Setup

The MK2200 can communicate with a host using a serial cable connected to the Scanner/Printer (RS-232) port.

1.

Insert the power supply barrel connector into the MK2200 power port. See

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

.

2.

Route the power cable.

3.

Plug the Symbol AC power supply into a wall outlet.

4.

Connect the RS-232 serial cable to the Scanner/Printer (RS-232) port on the MK2200. See

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

for port locations. Ensure the cable is terminated according to the

Scanner/Printer (RS-232) Port

Connections

pin-outs described in

Table 2-4 on page 2-16

.

5.

Plug the other end of the serial cable into the host.

NOTE

Because there is no service running on the MK2200’s RS-232 port, harmful data cannot be pushed to the MK2200 from another computer regardless of how the serial port is used.

Figure 2-9

RS-485 Two-Wire Multidrop Network Example

Installation 2 - 13

2 - 14 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Peripherals

You can use the RS-232 port to connect to a peripheral device such as a printer or a decoded scanner. For port locations, see

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

. The Scanner/Printer (RS-232) port can also supply power (5 Vdc up to

500mA) to peripheral devices using a “virtual” COM port that enables power to the connector.

Confirm the connector pin-out before attaching the cable. See

Scanner/Printer (RS-232) Port Connections on page 2-16

. For tethered scanner connection, see

Connecting a Tethered Scanner on page 3-21

.

1.

Attach the peripheral device cable to the Scanner/Printer (RS-232) port on the MK2200. See

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

for port locations. Ensure the cable is terminated according to

Table 2-4 on page 2-16

.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the peripheral device.

COM Port

Table 2-1

COM Port

COM

COM1

COM4

COM6

Port

RS-485

RS-232 (no power)

RS-232 (with 5 VDC)

Connector

RS-485

Scanner/Printer

Scanner/Printer

Installation 2 - 15

Connector Pin-Outs

Table 2-2

through

Table 2-4

identify the MK2200 connector pin-outs. See

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

for port locations.

10-Pin

Pin 10

Pin 1

Figure 2-10

10-Pin Connector Port

Ethernet / Bias-T Port Connections

The Ethernet connector provides both Ethernet signals and power supply voltage to the MK2200 through a single Ethernet cable. If providing power to the MK2200 through POE, do not use the Symbol AC power supply.

Table 2-2

Power-over-Ethernet Connections

Pin Description

Pin 1

Pin 2

Pin 3

Reserved/Do not Use

TXD (+)

TXD (-)

Pin 4

Pin 5

*

Pin 6

*

Pin 7

Pin 8

*

Pin 9

*

RXD (+)

Bias-T VCC

Bias-T VCC

RXD (-)

Bias-T GND

Bias-T GND

Pin 10 Reserved/Do not Use

*

Used only with Power-over-Ethernet

2 - 16 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

RS-485 Port Connections

Table 2-3

RS-485 Connector: 10-Pin

Pin 1

Pin Description

RS-485 (+)

Pin 2

Pin 3

RS-485 (+)

Reserved

Pin 4

Pin 5

Pin 6

Pin 7

Reserved

USB PWR

USB -

USB +

Pin 8

Pin 9

Pin 10

RS-485 (-)

GND

RS-485 (-)

Scanner/Printer (RS-232) Port Connections

Use this connector pin-out for serial communication with the host or communication with an external decoded scanner. The powered Scanner/Printer (RS-232) port specifications are RJ-45 jack, 10 conductor, 5V/500mA.

Table 2-4

Scanner/Printer (RS-232) Connector: 10-Pin

Pin Description

Pin 1 +5V

Pin 2

Pin 3

Pin 4

Pin 5

Not Used

RXD (input)

Not Used

RTS (output)

Pin 6

Pin 7

Pin 8

Pin 9

Pin 10

GND

CTS (input)

Not Used

TXD (output)

Not Used

Installation 2 - 17

Magnetic Stripe Reader (MSR) Mounting

NOTE

The MSR increases the width of the MK2200 from 8.92 inches to 11.5 inches. The height and depth do not change.

To mount the optional Magnetic Stripe Reader (MSR) onto the MK2200:

1.

Gently place the MK2200 face down on a flat surface, using care not to damage the touch panel display.

Move to the right second

Move up first

Figure 2-11

Removal Directions

2 - 18 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

2.

Remove the three screws shown in

Figure 2-12

from the back of the MK2200 and remove the protective cover. Retain only the screw from the protective cover. Two new (longer) screws are provided with the

MSR.

Protective Cover

Remove Screws (3)

Figure 2-12

Removing the Cover and Screws

CAUTION

When removing an access cover, follow proper ESD precautions to avoid damaging sensitive components. These precautions include, but are not limited to, working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the operator is properly grounded. Failure to apply proper ESD precautions can damage the MK2200 and void the warranty.

3.

Connect the MSR cable to the MK2200.

Connect

Cable

Figure 2-13

Connecting the MSR Cable to the MK2200

Installation 2 - 19

4.

Align the mounting holes on the MSR with the MSR mounting holes on the MK2200 as shown in

Figure

2-14

.

MSR

Figure 2-14

Positioning the MSR on the MK2200

5.

Secure the MSR to the MK2200 as shown in

Figure 2-15

. Use the shorter screw from the protective cover, and two new (longer) screws provided with the MSR.

Install Three Screws

Figure 2-15

Securing the MSR to the MK2200

2 - 20 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Figure 2-16

shows the MSR mounted to the MK2200 for card reading.

Figure 2-16

View of MSR Mounted to the MK2200

Installation 2 - 21

Installing/Removing the RF Card

NOTE

T

his section applies to factory-shipped RF models only.

To remove and re-install the RF card:

1.

Disconnect power from the MK2200.

2.

Gently place the MK2200 face down on a flat surface, using care not to damage the touch panel display.

3.

Remove the PCMCIA access cover.

PCMCIA Access Cover

Figure 2-17

MK2200 Rear View

CAUTION

When removing an access cover, follow proper ESD precautions to avoid damaging sensitive components. These precautions include, but are not limited to, working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the operator is properly grounded. Failure to apply proper ESD precautions can damage the MK2200 and void the warranty.

2 - 22 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

4.

Remove the RF card as shown in

Figure 2-18

.

1

Remove two screws on the bracket, then remove bracket.

3

Press ejector button.

4

Slide RF card out.

RF card slot

Figure 2-18

Removing the RF Card from the MK2200

5.

Install the RF card as shown in

Figure 2-19

.

2

Carefully disconnect cable.

Pull connector straight out from back of card.

Use care not to pull on antenna cable.

5

Cover end of cable with kapton tape.

RF card slot

1

Slide RF card in

(orientation varies depending on card, but only fits securely one way).

2

Connect cable.

3

Install bracket (only if

MK2200 is being transported).

Figure 2-19

Installing the RF Card in the MK2200

6.

Re-install the PCMCIA access cover.

Chapter 3

Chapter 3

Chapter 3

Configuration

Configuration

Overview

This chapter describes how to set up and configure the MK2200 applications, communications, and network settings which include parameters such as the device name, internet browser settings, date and time, and several other key settings.

Configure these settings remotely using the Symbol Remote Device Manager (RDM), or locally on the MK2200 using the System Menu. These settings are saved in the configuration registry file (mkconfig.reg) in the

MK2200 Application folder to maintain them across cold boot cycles.

Table 3-1

Methods of Configuring the MK2200

Configuration Method Remote

Remote Device Manager (RDM) X

System Menu

Control Panel

X

X

Local

Remote Configuration using Symbol Remote Device Manager

Use the Symbol Remote Device Manager (RDM) to configure parameters remotely. RDM is a

Windows

®

-based utility that runs on a host computer and generates/edits an MK2200 configuration file

(mkconfig.reg). Load this file onto the MK2200 and reboot the MK2200 to configure the device.

See

Chapter 4, Remote Device Manager

for more details.

Local Configuration

Using the System Menu

The System Menu function sets configuration parameters locally on the MK2200. The System Menu is similar to the MK2200 Configuration Utility window of the RDM, except the virtual keyboard is used to enter information. From within the System menu, use the

File > Save

option to save the changes and update the configuration registry file (mkconfig.reg). The new settings are invoked upon the next cold boot. See

System

Menu on page 3-5

.

3 - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Using the Microsoft Windows Control Panel

The Control Panel on the MK2200 Start menu changes a limited number of parameters. If desired, use the

Control Panel to change the functions listed in

Control Panel Configuration Parameters on page 3-24

; however

Symbol recommends only changing the Stylus Settings/Touch Screen Calibration using the Control Panel. To save changes to the mkconfig.reg configuration file, select

Start > Programs > Save Configuration

to maintain the settings across cold boot cycles.

Updating the Device Configuration File

Use one of the following methods to update the device configuration file (mkconfig.reg) locally on the MK2200.

Start > Programs > Save Configuration

Figure 3-1

Save Configuration Screens

The Save Configuration option uses the current registry parameter values and writes them to the mkcofig.reg file. The windows shown in

Figure 3-1

appear while the file is saved and written. Not all registry values are saved with this option; only the registry parameter values that can be configured using the RDM or the System Menu (and some system parameters) are written and saved to the mkconfig.reg file.

Start > Programs > System Menu > File > Save

.

Figure 3-2

System Menu Main Screen

Configuration 3 - 3

This option reads the current content of the mkcofig.reg file, allows user changes, then writes them back

to the mkcofig.reg file. The window shown in

Figure 3-2

reads and displays the current contents of the mkconfig.reg file. Tap an item listed in the left window pane to display current mkconfig.reg file information. Edits are permitted to the current file information in the text boxes that appear in the right pane. Tap

File > Save

to save changes and write them to the mkconfig.reg file.

NOTE

If upgrading the MK2200 OS and a configuration (.reg) file was created using an older OS

version, you must create a new .reg file (see

Creating a Configuration File on page 4-12

). For more information about upgrades, see

Appendix G, OS Upgrade Procedures

.

Downloading the Configuration File to the MK2200

Before downloading the configuration file (.reg file) to the MK2200

Application

folder, rename it

mkconfig.reg

.

In MK2200 Configuration Utility window, select

File > Open

and select the file, then select

File > Save As

, rename the file

mkconfig.reg

, and click

Save

.

Use one of the following methods to download the file to the MK2200:

Use the RDM to “push” the file to the MK2200(s) (see

Downloading the Configuration File to the MK2200

Using the RDM on page 4-14

).

Copy the mkconfig.reg file to the MK2200

Application

folder using a USB ActiveSync connection (see

Downloading the Configuration File Using ActiveSync on page 3-3

).

Send the file to the MK2200

Application

folder using FTP (see the instructions provided with the FTP software) or AirBeam.

Copy the mkconfig.reg file to a PCMCIA card, then transfer the file into the MK2200

Application

folder.

Downloading the Configuration File Using ActiveSync

To copy the mkconfig.reg from the host computer to the MK2200

Application

folder (

My Computer/Application

) using ActiveSync:

1.

Connect the MK2200 to the host computer by connecting the USB cable (Symbol p/n 25-64626-01) to the

RS-485 port on the MK2200, and the other end to a USB port on the host computer.

2.

In ActiveSync on the host computer, click

Explore

. Windows

®

Explorer opens the Mobile Device window for the MK2200.

3.

Open a new Windows

®

Explorer and browse the host computer to locate the file.

4.

Right-click on the file and select

Copy

.

5.

Right-click in the MK2200

Application

folder and select

Paste

. A prompt requests to overwrite the existing file (if present).

NOTE

Use the RDM or System Menu to enable ActiveSync support in the MK2200 if support is disabled.

3 - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Rebooting the MK2200

After downloading the mkconfig.reg file, perform a remote or local cold boot to apply the new settings.

Remote Boot

After loading the configuration file onto the MK2200 using the wired or wireless Ethernet connection, use the

RDM to send a command over the network to initiate a remote cold boot of the MK2200.

1.

Select the MK2200 to cold boot from the list box in the

Remote Device Manager

screen.

2.

From the RDM main toolbar, select

Actions > Cold Boot

. Allow approximately one minute for the MK2200 to reboot and reconnect, then select

View > Refresh

to verify the device rebooted successfully.

Local Boot

To manually cold boot the MK2200, which enables the settings within the mkconfig.reg file to load, press and hold buttons

B

and

C

on the MK2200 (see

Figure 1-1 on page 1-3

) until the display goes blank (typically 15

seconds), then release the buttons.

Configuration 3 - 5

System Menu

Setting Defaults Using the System Menu

Use the System Menu to set parameter values locally on the MK2200. See

Default Parameters on page 3-6

for these options. The System Menu is identical to the MK2200 Configuration Utility window, and provides local instead of remote access to the same parameters. The System Menu modifies parameters in the configuration file (mkconfig.reg) on the MK2200.

NOTE

Saving the System Menu configuration overwrites mkconfig.reg. Reboot the MK2200 to apply the values.

To launch the System Menu, even while an application is running, press the physical buttons A, B, and C simultaneously. Use the virtual keyboard to enter data. To launch the virtual keyboard, press buttons B and C simultaneously.

As with the MK2200 Configuration Utility window, the parameters in the System Menu fall into five categories:

Configuration file Information

Applications

Communications

System configuration

Update.

Figure 3-3

System Menu Main Screen

3 - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Default Parameters

The default settings that follow apply to both the Remote Device Manager on a host computer and System

Menu on the MK2200.

Configuration File Information

The first branch of the MK2200 Configuration Utility window and System Menu is Configuration File

Information. Use this to track mkconfig.reg version information.

Table 3-2

provides descriptions for these

parameters.

Table 3-2

Configuration File Version Information Parameters

Configuration File

Information Parameters

Description

Configuration File Version Configuration File Version Information

Version

Default

Description

Use the Version parameter to track the version number of the mkconfig.reg file.

Use the Description parameter to write a detailed description of the location, use, and the changes made on the deployed mkconfig.reg file.

Applications

The second branch of the MK2200 Configuration Utility window and System Menu is

Applications

.

Table 3-3

provides descriptions and defaults for these parameters.

Table 3-3

Application Default Parameters

Application Parameters Description Default

Internet Explorer

Anchor Underline no

Cache Limit

Search Page

Internet Explorer Configuration

Specifies whether an anchor or link is underlined or not.

Specifies the cache size for

Internet Explorer, in kilobytes.

Specifies the default search page for Internet Explorer.

512 kB (0x200 hex) http://search.msn.com

Secure Protocols

Smooth Scroll

Specifies the security settings configuration for Internet

Explorer.

Check to enable smooth scrolling in Internet Explorer.

TLS 1.0 disabled,

SSL 2.0, SSL3.0 enabled

Disabled

Configuration 3 - 7

Table 3-3

Application Default Parameters (Continued)

Application Parameters

Start Page

Description

The default home page for

Internet Explorer.

Play Background Sounds

Kiosk IE

ErrorRecoveryPage

Check to enable playing of sound files in an html page.

Kiosk IE Configuration

Default

file:///windows/mk2200.htm

Enabled

Specifies an error recovery page for Internet Explorer. When an error is detected, the browser is redirected to this page.

\Windows\RetryPage.html

NeedProgressBar

Media Player

Windows Media Buffer

Playback

Check to display a progress bar on the left top corner of the

Kiosk IE which indicates the progress of downloading a page to the Kiosk IE. Enable this feature when deploying MK2200 devices in a slow network.

Disabled

Media Player Configuration parameters

Specifies the Windows Media

Player buffer time in seconds.

3 seconds

Enables/disables playback feature on Windows Media

Player. Checking the Playback option enables playback of media files indefinitely.

Disabled

Scanner Wedge Scanner Wedge Configuration

Append Enter To Barcode?

Check to add an ENTER to the end of each bar code.

Append Tab to Barcode? Check to add a TAB character to the end of each bar code (and after ENTER, if enabled).

Trigger Mode

Disabled

Disabled

Scanning Mode

Prefix

Specifies whether to constantly trigger the scanner laser or trigger it manually.

Manual Trigger

Specifies scanner raster mode.

Omnidirectional - 1D only

Specifies text to add to the beginning of a bar code.

None

Suffix Specifies text to add to the end of bar code, before TAB/ENTER

(if enabled).

None

3 - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table 3-3

Application Default Parameters (Continued)

Application Parameters

Transmit Code ID

Description

Transmit bar code type identifier. None

No Shell Present

Slide Show

Background Color

Default

Flag indicating the wedge should not put an item on the system tray.

Disabled

Slide Show Inactivity Application parameters

Display Duration

Image Directory

Default screen background color if image is smaller than screen.

Format is 0BGR, where the first byte is zero, and the rest are byte values for each color.

7340032 (0x700000 hex)

5 (0x5 hex) The duration, in seconds, to display each image before loading the next image. The minimum delay allowed is 2s. If this value is less than 2s

SlideShow takes delay as system default of 5s.

The directory that contains the images to display.

\Application\Slides

Communications

The third branch of the MK2200 Configuration Utility window and System Menu is

Communications

.

Table 3-4

describes these wired Ethernet parameters. To configure DHCP options, see

DHCP Configuration on page

4-25

, and to specify RF settings for wireless networks see

Specifying RF Settings for Wireless Network

Connections on page 3-9

.

Table 3-4

Communication Default Parameters

Communication

Parameters

Description

Onboard Wired Ethernet Onboard Wired Ethernet Configuration

Enable DHCP

Default

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Check to turn on DHCP Address resolution. When checked, do not set IP Address, Subnet Mask,

Gateway, DNS Server(s), or WINS

Server(s).

Enabled

None Sets the IP Address for the

Onboard Wired Ethernet adapter.

Sets the subnet mask for the

Onboard Wired Ethernet adapter.

None

Default Gateway Sets the Default Gateway for the

Onboard Wired Ethernet adapter.

None

Configuration 3 - 9

Table 3-4

Communication Default Parameters (Continued)

Communication

Parameters

Description

DHCP Options Opens

DHCP Options

dialog (see

DHCP Configuration on page

4-25

).

DHCP Server

None

Specifies DHCP server. The device contacts the specified server for retrieving IP address and other network parameters. If the DHCP is not specified, device automatically broadcasts for the server for retrieving IP address.

None

DNS Domain

DNS Server(s)

WINS Server(s)

The domain name for the Onboard

Wired Ethernet adapter.

None

A list of DNS servers, in the order to query.

None

A list of WINS servers, in the order to query.

None

Default

Specifying RF Settings for Wireless Network Connections

To enable a wireless MK2200 to work on an RF network, configure RF settings as defined in

Appendix B, RF

Network Configuration

.

Two utilities are available for specifying wireless security:

Aegis Client (

page B-2 )

Mobile Companion (

page B-3

).

RF devices shipped with a wireless card include both the Aegis Client and Mobile Companion pre-installed.

The default client is Aegis.

NOTE

RF settings are not stored within the mkconfig.reg file or entered via the RDM. For details on configuring RF settings, see

page B-1

.

3 - 10 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

System Configuration

The fourth branch of the MK2200 Configuration Utility window and System Menu is

System Configuration

.

Table 3-5

lists these parameters and their descriptions. Also see:

Device Activity Management (Sleep/Wake-up Functionality) on page 3-20

Printing on page 3-20

Configuring User Application(s) on page 3-22

.

Table 3-5

System Configuration Default Parameters

System Configuration Parameters

ActiveSync

Description

ActiveSync Configuration

EnableActiveSync

Backlight

Brightness

Buttons

Button A

Button B

Button C

Button D

Button A and B

Button A and C

Button B and C

Button A, B, and C

Button A and D

Button B and D

Button A, B, and D

Button C and D

Button A, C, and D

Button B, C, and D

Button A, B, C, and D

ActiveSync is enabled at all times, even when an application is running.

Backlight Configuration

Default display backlight brightness.

Enabled

Bright (maximum)

Configuration of MK2200 four buttons.

See

Table 8-6 on page 8-9

.

Button A default 38 (0x26 hex) Up

Button B default

Button C default

Button D default

Button A and B default

Button A and C default

Button B and C default

Button A, B, and C default

Button A and D default

Button B and D default

Button A, B, and D default

Button C and D default

Button A, C, and D default

Button B, C, and D default

Button A, B, C, and D default

40 (0x28 hex)

37 (0x25 hex)

39 (0x27 hex)

13 (0xd hex)

194 (0xc2 hex) Shift-Tab

199 (0xc7 hex) Input Panel

197 (0xc5 hex) System Menu

18 (0x12 hex)

9 (0x9 hex)

Alt

Tab

195 (0xc3 hex) Alt-Down

27 (0x1b hex)

196 (0xc4 hex) Calibration

8 (0x8 hex)

Default

Down

Left

Right

Enter

Cancel/ESC

Backspace

198 (0xc6 hex) Signal Strength

Configuration 3 - 11

Table 3-5

System Configuration Default Parameters (Continued)

System Configuration Parameters

Trigger Time

Description

Button combination trigger time, in milliseconds. Specifies the maximum time between button presses for them to be considered a button combination.

Default

500 (0x1f4hex)

Button Security Enables/disables the button security functionality on the

MK2200 device.

Check to lock the buttons.

These can only be unlocked by entering the button security password.

Enabled

Date and Time Settings

Time Zone

Daylight Saving

AutoDST

HomeDST

Date and Time Configuration

Standard time zone.

Drop-down list of time zone names, such as

Pacific

Standard Time

or

South Africa

Standard Time

. Select the appropriate time zone.

Pacific Standard Time

Daylight Saving Configuration

Check to enable daylight saving time for the current time zone.

When enabled, the Windows

Explorer shell uses this setting to set the system time for daylight saving. Use this setting if the application runs with the Windows Explorer shell.

Enabled

Check to enable daylight saving time for the current time zone.

Use this setting if application does not run with Windows

Explorer shell, for example when developing a browser

(Kiosk IE) based application.

Enabled

3 - 12 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table 3-5

System Configuration Default Parameters (Continued)

System Configuration Parameters

Device Activity Management

Description Default

There are three slots with identical parameters:

First Activity Configuration

Second Activity Configuration

Third Activity Configuration

See

Device Activity Management (Sleep/Wake-up Functionality) on page 3-20

.

Items All

Days

Devices to apply activity scheme to.

Set of days on which to apply this activity scheme (Monday through Sunday).

None

On Time

Off Time

Identification

Name

Description

Contact

Time when device is activated, using 24 hour clock representation. Set this value for correct functioning of the

Device Activity Manager.

None

None Time when device is deactivated, using 24 hour clock representation. Set this value for correct functioning of the Device Activity Manager.

General Configuration

Specifies device name.

Specifies device description.

Contact details of the system administrator.

MK2200

MK2200 MicroKiosk

Your System Contact Here

Location

Configuration Group 1

Configuration Group 2

Specifies the location of the device.

First user-definable string.

Intended for use when grouping devices to aid configuration. Can be used as part of device filter in the

Configuration Utility.

Second user-definable string.

Intended for use when grouping devices to aid configuration. Can be used as part of device filter in the

Configuration Utility.

Your Location Here

None

None

Configuration 3 - 13

Table 3-5

System Configuration Default Parameters (Continued)

System Configuration Parameters

Inactivity Manager

Description

Inactivity Manager Configuration

(Screen Saver) on page 8-12

)

(see

Default

Inactivity Application

Inactivity Application Name

Idle Time Before Launch

Memory Allocation

SystemStorePercent

Inactivity application.

Idle time before inactivity application launches, in seconds.

\Windows\SimpleSaver.exe

0 (0x0 hex)

Memory Partition of Storage Memory and System Memory

Percentage of memory used for storage. The remaining memory is allocated to program memory (memory used to run programs). Half the unused RAM is used, when the value assigned to

SystemStorePercent does not provide enough memory for the device to operate normally.

This parameter only configures unused RAM.

50 (0x32 hex)

Network Time Update

Time Server

Refresh

Configuration of Simple Network Time Protocol client

(see

Network Time Update: SNTP Client on page 8-10

for details)

tock.usno.navy.mil

Specifies the domain name of the time server to contact for updates. If no time server is set in the field, the time service is disabled.

Do not set an IP address for this parameter.

If the MK2200 is unable to obtain a time value from the time server, it uses the default setting (June 1, 1999 12:00:00

PM), and does not re-attempt to acquire a time value unless a regular update is also configured (the next attempt occurs at the configured time).

Specifies the time period, in milliseconds, between synchronizations with the

SNTP server.

1209600000 (0x48190800 hex)

3 - 14 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table 3-5

System Configuration Default Parameters (Continued)

System Configuration Parameters

Recovery Refresh

Description

Specifies the time period, in milliseconds, until next synchronization, if the previous synchronization attempt failed.

Default

86400000 (0x5265c00 hex)

Threshold Specifies the interval between the time on the SNTP server and the current time in milliseconds. If the difference between the SNTP server time and the local system time is larger than the specified value in Threshold parameter, the update is ignored.

86400000 (0x5265c00 hex)

Printer Configuration

Active Printer

Zebra QL Series

Zebra QL Series Flow Control

Zebra EPL Series Transport

Printer Configuration

(see

Printing on page 3-20

)

Use this parameter to set the active printer. Select the printer from the list.

Zebra (QL320, Cameo, Encore)

Specifies the baud rate for the

Zebra QL Series printer if it is the selected active printer.

19200

Specifies the flow control of the

Zebra QL Series printer if it is the selected active printer.

No flow control

Specifies the transport mode for the Zebra EPL Series printer if it is the selected active printer. For a list of supported EPL printers, see

Printing on page 3-20

.

Serial

Zebra EPL Series Specifies the baud rate of the

Zebra EPL Series printer if it is the selected active printer. For a list of supported EPL printers, see

Printing on page

3-20

.

9600

Zebra EPL Series Flow Control Specifies the flow control of the

Zebra EPL Series printer if it is the selected active printer. For a list of supported EPL printers, see

Printing on page

3-20

.

No flow control

Configuration 3 - 15

Table 3-5

System Configuration Default Parameters (Continued)

System Configuration Parameters

Zebra ZPL Series Transport

Description

Specifies the transport mode for the Zebra ZPL Series printer if it is the selected active printer. For a list of supported ZPL printers, see

Printing on page 3-20

.

Zebra ZPL Series

Serial

Specifies the baud rate of the

Zebra ZPL Series printer if it is the selected active printer. For a list of supported ZPL printers,

see

Printing on page 3-20

.

9600

Default

Zebra ZPL Series Flow Control Specifies the flow control of the

Zebra ZPL Series printer if it is the selected active printer. For a list of supported ZPL printers,

see

Printing on page 3-20

.

No flow control

Epson TML90 Transport Serial

Epson TML90

Specifies the transport mode for the Epson TML90 printer if it is the selected active printer.

Specifies the baud rate of the

TML90 printer if it is the selected active printer.

9600

Epson TML90 Flow Control

Epson TMT88III Transport

Epson TMT88III

Specifies the flow control of the

Epson TML90 printer if it is the selected active printer.

No flow control

Serial Specifies the transport mode for the Epson TMT88III printer if it is the selected active printer.

Specifies the baud rate of the

Epson TMT88III printer if it is the selected active printer.

9600

Epson TMT88III Flow Control

Protected Mode

Password

Specifies the flow control of the

Epson TMT88III printer if it is the selected active printer.

No flow control

Gate Keeper Configuration

(see

Password Protection (Gate

Keeper) on page 8-7

)

44213 (denoted with *****) Required for Protected Mode access. Buttons are assigned numeric values from left to right (A=1, D=4).

3 - 16 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table 3-5

System Configuration Default Parameters (Continued)

System Configuration Parameters

Application Application to run in Protected

Mode.

Description

Regional Settings - General

Default

\windows\explorer.exe

HTML in web pages does not use regional settings without programmatic support. To use regional settings, script in web pages must format dates, times, currency, and numbers using built-in functions that take the regional settings into account. This is the only method of using the regional settings in a browser. C/C++/C# apps can use regional settings through the standard Windows CE API.

Configuration of Date Regional Settings Regional Settings - Date

Long Date

Short Date

Short Date Separator

Long date format.

Short date format.

Character uses as the short date separator.

dddd, MMMM dd, yyyy

/

M/d/yyyy

Regional Settings - Time

PM indicator

AM indicator

Time Separator

Configuration of Time Regional Settings

PM indicator.

AM indicator.

Time separator (generally 1 character).

None

None

None

Leading Zero Display leading zero for hours/minutes/seconds.

Disabled

Time Format Time format.

None

Regional Settings - Currency Configuration of Currency Regional Settings

Digits In Group 0

Grouping Symbol

Number of digits allowed in a group.

Digit grouping symbol

(generally zero or one character).

None

Digits After Decimal

Decimal Symbol

Negative Format

The number of digits allowed after a decimal point.

Decimal symbol (one character).

0

None

Format for negative currency values. The asterisk (\"*\") denotes the universal currency symbol. The period (\".\") indicates the chosen decimal separator.

(*1.1)

Configuration 3 - 17

Table 3-5

System Configuration Default Parameters (Continued)

System Configuration Parameters

Currency Symbol Position

Description

Position of currency symbol.

The asterisk (\"*\") denotes the universal currency symbol. The period (\".\") indicates the chosen decimal separator.

*1.1

Currency Symbol Currency symbol.

$

Regional Settings - Numbers Configuration of Number Regional Settings

Default

List Separators

Measurement System

Display Leading Zero

Negative Number Format

List separators (character).

Measurement system.

Display leading zero.

Negative number format. The period (\".\") indicates the chosen decimal separator.

None

Metric

Enabled

(1.1)

Negative Sign

Digits In Group

Grouping Symbol

Digits After Decimal

Decimal Symbol

Screen Taps

Double-Click Distance

Double-Click Speed

Negative sign

(generally one character).

Number of digits in group.

Digit grouping symbol

(generally zero or one character).

None

0

None

The number of digits allowed after a decimal point.

Decimal symbol (one character).

Screen Tap Configuration

0

None

Specifies the maximum number of pixels between two screen taps to qualify the screen taps as a double-click.

Use this parameter to differentiate double-clicks from screen taps.

6 (0x6 hex)

Specifies the maximum number of milliseconds between two screen taps to qualify the screen taps as a double-click. Use this parameter to differentiate double-clicks from screen taps.

500 (0x1f4 hex)

3 - 18 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table 3-5

System Configuration Default Parameters (Continued)

System Configuration Parameters

Tethered Scanner

Description

Tethered Scanner Configuration

Enabled Enables or disables tethered scanner support. Disable if no tethered scanner is connected.

Disabled

Scanner Model

Serial Port

Baud Rate

Specifies the scanner model to support.

LS1902T

COM6 Specifies the serial port to which the scanner is connected.

Specifies the baud rate for communication with tethered scanner. Configure tethered scanner separately.

9600

Stop Bits

Data Bits

Parity

Intercharacter Timeout

User Apps

Application Path

Arguments

Delay Before Launch

Waiting For Completion

Default

Specifies the number of stop bits in serial frame.

Specifies the number of data bits (generally 8).

1

8

Specifies the parity bit configuration.

None

Timeout (in milliseconds) between characters before bar code is considered complete.

64 (0x40 hex)

There are seven user application slots, with identical parameters.

Each slot is under a group called “X Application Launched”, where

“X” is First, Second, etc.

See

Configuring User Application(s) on page 3-22

for details.

Full path to application.

First application:

\windows\explorer.exe

Remaining applications: None

None Command line arguments for the program (UNICODE string).

Number of seconds to delay before launching program.

0

Specifies whether to wait for program to complete before proceeding.

Continue List Immediately

Configuration 3 - 19

Table 3-5

System Configuration Default Parameters (Continued)

System Configuration Parameters

Volume and Sounds

Description

Volume and Sound Configuration

Default System Volume

Default Beeper Volume

Sounds Generated By

Sets the overall default volume.

Specifies volume of beeper.

Screen Tap Sounds

Controls whether system events, etc. generate sounds.

Specifies whether screen touches generate a sound, and, if so, at what volume.

Maximum

Default

High

Events, Applications and

Notifications enabled

Enabled, Loud

Key Press Sounds Specifies whether key presses generate a sound, and, if so, at what volume.

Enabled, Loud

Scheme for sounds.

DefaultSounds Sound Scheme

USB Host

Enable USB Host

Web Server

Enable WebServer

USB Host Configuration

Enables/disables the USB host in the device.

Disable

Web Server in MK2200 Configuration

Enables/disables the Web

Server in the device.

Enable

3 - 20 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Device Activity Management (Sleep/Wake-up Functionality)

Use the Device Activity Manager to manage the device usage profile and lifecycle by turning on/off the scan engine laser and the display backlight. Set the sleep and wake-up times by day, weekday, weekend, etc.

NOTE

It is strongly advised to use the Device Activity Management functionality.

If the Device Activity Manager (DAM) puts the scan engine and/or backlight into sleep mode, these subsystems repower (wake up) upon the following events:

• a button press a display touch.

The DAM only checks whether to turn devices on or off when the Inactivity Application Timeout expires. If a device wakes up due to user input (a “wakeup”), it remains awake regardless of user input until another timeout expires, then goes back to sleep.

To use the DAM without the Inactivity Application Manager, configure the Inactivity Application Timeout to the default wakeup time and set the Inactivity Application parameter to nothing.

NOTE

Use the RDM or System Menu to set up the Device Activity Manager. Enter valid values to

all DAM parameters (see page 3-12 ). Otherwise the system rejects the input values and the DAM

does not invoke the Inactivity Application.

Printing

The MK2200 supports printing text, bar codes, and bitmaps in the following environments:

Browser applications

C/C++ applications

C# applications

Visual Basic.NET applications.

The MK2200 transmits data to a printer using an RS-232 serial or USB connection. RS-232 serial port settings

(port, stop bits, data bits, parity) are shared with the tethered scanner.

Table 3-5

contains the default baud rate

settings for the following printers:

Zebra QL (QL320, Cameo, Encore)

Zebra EPL Series (LP/TLP 2824, LP/TLP 2844, TLP 3842)*

Zebra ZPL (LP/TLP 2844-Z, TLP 3844-Z)

Epson TML90

Epson TMT88III.

* Zebra LP printers ship in Gap mode. If using a printer in Continuous Paper mode, the autosense does not work and you must manually set the gap to zero. To avoid this, send a command to the printer to change the mode. Refer to the Zebra printer documentation.

Configuration 3 - 21

Advanced Printer Monitoring Functionality

For some printers, such as the Zebra QL Series, the MK2200 supports advanced printer monitoring functionality, such as:

Detecting if the printer cable is connected

Detecting if the printer power is on

Detecting if the printer is out of paper

Detecting if the printer door is open.

Connecting a Tethered Scanner

The MK2200 supports attachment of the Symbol LS1902T external tethered hand-held scanner. The tethered scanner data integrates into the data stream generated by the internal scanner driver. The data originating from the tethered scanner uses the same format as the data from the internal scanner.

This feature supports the following programming environments:

C/C++

Browser

.NET.

To configure the MK2200 for tethered scanner support:

1.

Configure the MK2200 serial port. In the MK2200 Configuration Utility window, enable support for a tethered external scanner and set the serial parameters (baud, parity, data bits, stop bits). Note that flow control is not supported. See

Tethered Scanner on page 3-18

.

2.

Attach the external scanner using cable p/n 25-56221-20.

3.

Use the tethered scanner

Product Reference Guide

to set the following parameters in order to operate with the MK2200:

• Set

Transmit Code ID Character

to:

Symbol Code ID Character

• Set

RS-232 Host Type

to:

Standard RS-232

• Confirm the tethered scanner baud rate matches the setting in the MK2200 Configuration Utility window for the target MK2200.

3 - 22 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Configuring User Application(s)

The MK2200 Configuration Utility window configures the launching of user application(s). The seven definable application "slots" are processed upon power up. Programs launch in sequence with no delay, unless you set the

Delay Before Launch or Waiting For Completion

parameter.

The Startup program supports four parameters for each slot, detailed in

Table 3-6

: executable path, command

line arguments, delay before running, and a special flag.

Table 3-6

User Applications, Parameter Descriptions

Parameter

Application Path

Description

The full “run” path to the executable. Define this in order to process the entry (i.e., do not just specify a delay). File type associations are not supported. For example if the

Argument

contains a word document, specify the full path to wordpad.exe in the

Application Path

.

Arguments

Delay Before Launch

Optional. Command line arguments for the program above. Escape double quotation marks using a back slash character, as in \". Also escape back slashes, i.e., \\.

Optional. Specifies the number of seconds to delay before launching the

User Application, if a previous program needs to complete or to ensure system resources are available. This is a simple way to handle

sequencing; see

Reliable Sequencing of Application Programs on page

3-22

for more complex situations (requires “wait for completion”).

Waiting For Completion Specifies whether the startup sequence waits for this program to complete before launching the next one, typically set to Disabled. See

Reliable

Sequencing of Application Programs on page 3-22

.

Reliable Sequencing of Application Programs

Use the

Delay Before Launch

and

Wait for Completion

parameters to set the startup process parameters:

If an application requires a definitive order of execution

To provide a signal between components to detect failures

To verify that local or networked resources are available before the main application launches.

Use the

Delay Before Launch

parameter to achieve a delay in the launch sequence. However, this is not a robust way to ensure correct system operation. The recommended method is to write a separate program, with or without a user interface, that performs required checks then terminates, possibly setting a registry value or filesystem flag to indicate success. Set the

Wait For Completion

flag and run this program before running the main application(s).

Configuration 3 - 23

Update

The fifth branch of the MK2200 Configuration Utility window and System Menu is

Update

. The default parameters are listed in

Table 3-7

.

Table 3-7

Update Default Parameters

Update Parameters

FTP Server

Description

FTP Configuration

Default

Allow Anonymous

Allow Anonymous Upload Determines whether authorization is required for uploading files to server.

FTP Enable Part I

Determines whether the server allows anonymous access.

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled Determines whether the FTP server is loaded/accessible when the kiosk is powered on. Note that disabling this parameter has no impact on the ability to load or retrieve mkconfig.reg files via the Remote

Device Manager's

Push

Configuration File

and

Retrieve

Remote Configuration File

functionality.

FTP Enable Part II

Root Directory

Enabling this parameter allows the

RDM to load/retrieve a mkconfig.reg file even if the kiosk's FTP server is disabled (

FTP Enable Part I = disabled

). If this parameter and

FTP

Enable Part I

are both disabled, you cannot load an mkconfig.reg file remotely via the Configuration Utility or FTP. You can still load an mkconfig.reg file locally via an

ActiveSync connection or a PC card.

Enabled

Directory and subdirectories of this key are accessible remotely. If this value is not set in the registry, the default is \Temp.

\

Use Authentication

User Authentication

Domain

User List

Determines whether authorization is required to connect to the server.

Disabled

Domain that holds information on authentic users that are allowed to access FTP service from the server.

None

List of users able to access the FTP server.

None

3 - 24 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Control Panel Configuration Parameters

When using the Windows

®

desktop Control Panel to modify certain MK2200 configuration settings, select

Start

> Programs > Save Configuration

on the MK2200. This saves the changes to the mkconfig.reg file and retains them across cold boot cycles.

The Control Panel can set the following options:

Backlight Settings on page 3-24

Button Definitions on page 3-25

Date and Time on page 3-25

Inactivity Manager on page 3-26

Gate Keeper (Password Protection) on page 3-27

Volume and Sounds on page 3-27

Stylus Settings/Touch Screen Calibration on page 3-28

Regional Settings on page 3-30

Memory Allocation on page 3-31

.

For best results, use the system menu for all permanent changes (except recalibrating the touch screen).

Backlight Settings

To change the backlight intensity on the MK2200:

1.

Tap

Start > Settings > Control Panel

.

2.

Double-tap the

Backlight & Contrast

icon from the

Control Panel

window.

Figure 3-4

Backlight & Contrast Screen

3.

Select the desired intensity by tapping the radio button.

4.

Tap

OK

or

X

to close the screen and apply the selection.

5.

Tap

Start > Programs > Save Configuration

to save the new settings in the MK2200 configuration

(mkconfig.reg) file.

Button Definitions

To change the button mapping on the MK2200:

1.

Tap

Start > Settings > Control Panel

.

2.

Double-tap the

Button Definitions

icon from the Control Panel window.

Configuration 3 - 25

Figure 3-5

Button Definitions Screen

3.

Tap on the button to remap. The button’s current hex code appears in the text box.

4.

Using the input panel, enter the new value of the hex code in the text box to remap the button. Also use

this option to remap button combinations. See

Keycode Values on page 8-9

for correct key codes.

5.

To change the buttondown delay, enter the new value using the input panel.

6.

Tap

OK

or

X

to close the screen and apply the selection.

7.

Tap

Start > Programs > Save Configuration

to save the new settings in the MK2200 configuration

(mkconfig.reg) file.

Date and Time

To set the date/time on the MK2200:

1.

Tap

Start > Settings > Control Panel > Date/Time

icon.

Figure 3-6

Date/Time Properties Screen

3 - 26 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

2.

To set the month, tap the arrows on either side of the month shown, or select the month label to choose from a list of months.

3.

To select a date, tap the date in the calendar.

4.

To set the current time, highlight the hours, minutes, seconds or AM/PM field in the

Current Time

field. Tap the up/down scroll arrows to change the highlighted selection.

5.

To change the time zone, select it from the list labeled

Time Zone

.

6.

Tap on the check box for the system to automatically adjust the clock for daylight saving.

7.

Tap

Apply

to apply the new date/time settings.

NOTE

The date resets to June 1, 1999, 12:00 PM upon a cold boot. Use the Control Panel or the

SNTP Client to update this (see

Network Time Update: SNTP Client on page 8-10

).

To permanently set the time zone and daylight saving settings, use the RDM or System Menu on the MK2200.

Inactivity Manager

To set up the inactivity manager:

1.

Tap

Start > Settings > Control Panel

.

2.

Double-tap the

Inactivity Manager

icon.

Figure 3-7

Inactivity Manager Screen

3.

Select the application to run during inactivity by tapping the button. (The default application is

SimpleSaver.exe.)

4.

Enter the timeout (in seconds). The default is 0, which allows the system to run continuously without going into inactivity mode.

5.

Tap

OK

.

6.

Tap

Start > Programs > Save Configuration

to save the new settings in the MK2200 configuration

(mkconfig.reg) file.

Configuration 3 - 27

Gate Keeper (Password Protection)

To run an application in protected mode:

1.

Tap

Start > Settings > Control Panel

.

2.

Double-tap the

Gate Keeper

icon from the

Control Panel

window. The

Gate Keeper

screen displays.

Figure 3-8

Gate Keeper Screen

3.

Select the application to run in protected mode by tapping the button.

Note:

Changing this application is not recommended. Errors in this configuration parameter or the program that is run can prevent troubleshooting or interaction with the MK2200 in protected mode.

4.

Specify the password to access protected mode, and enter it a second time to confirm it.

5.

Tap

OK

.

6.

Tap

Start > Programs > Save Configuration

to save the new settings in the MK2200 configuration

(mkconfig.reg) file.

NOTE

When Button Security is enabled and the First User Application is not explorer.exe, a password is required to access functionality launched by the physical buttons.

Volume and Sounds

NOTE

Also set Volume and Sounds using the RDM. See

Volume and Sounds on page 3-19

.

To change the volume on the MK2200:

1.

Tap

Start > Settings > Control Panel > Volume & Sounds

icon.

Figure 3-9

Volume & Sound Properties Screen - Volume Tab

2.

Select volume options using the slide bar.

3 - 28 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

3.

Tap the

Sounds

tab to change event sounds.

Figure 3-10

Volume & Sound Properties Screen - Sounds Tab

4.

From the

Event

name list, select an event.

5.

From the

Sound

list, select a sound. To remove a sound from the selected event, select

(None)

.

6.

To save the changes to a different scheme, tap

Save As

, then name the sound scheme. To delete a sound scheme, select it in the

Scheme

list and tap

Delete

. To quickly turn off all event sounds, select

No sounds

from the

Scheme

list.

7.

Tap

OK

.

8.

Select

Start > Programs > Save Configuration

to save the new settings in the MK2200 configuration

(mkconfig.reg) file.

Stylus Settings/Touch Screen Calibration

The double-tap speed and calibration setting are factory-set. To recalibrate the Stylus settings:

1.

Tap

Start > Settings > Control Panel > Stylus

icon.

Figure 3-11

Stylus Properties Screen - Double-Tap Tab

2.

Double-tap the checkerboard grid at a comfortable speed.

3.

Double-tap the clapboard to test the settings. If the icon does not change, adjust the settings on the checkerboard and test the settings again.

Configuration 3 - 29

4.

If the MK2200 is not responding properly to taps, tap the

Calibration

tab to calibrate the screen.

Figure 3-12

Stylus Properties Screen - Calibrate Tab

NOTE

Alternatively, to access the Calibrate screen simultaneously press the buttons A, C, and D

(see

Figure 1-1 on page 1-3

).

5.

Tap the

Recalibrate

button and follow the directions on the screen.

Figure 3-13

Calibrate Screen

6.

The system returns to the

Stylus Properties

screen when calibration completes. To cancel calibration, press the

C

and

D

buttons simultaneously.

7.

Tap

OK

on the

Stylus Properties

screen.

Note that calibration values are stored separately from other configuration settings in non-volatile storage and cannot be accessed by the user.

3 - 30 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Regional Settings

To set up or change regional settings:

1.

Tap

Start > Settings > Control Panel > Regional Settings

icon.

Figure 3-14

Regional Settings Properties Screen - Regional Settings Tab

2.

On the

Regional Settings

tab, in

Your locale

(location), select the region to use for date, time, number, and currency formatting from the drop-down list.

3.

To change the way numbers appear, tap the

Number

tab and make the changes.

Figure 3-15

Regional Settings Properties Screen - Number Tab

4.

To change the way currency values appear, tap the

Currency

tab and make the changes.

Figure 3-16

Regional Settings Properties Screen - Currency Tab

5.

To change the way the time appears, tap the

Time

tab and make the changes.

Configuration 3 - 31

Figure 3-17

Regional Settings Properties Screen - Time Tab

6.

To change the way the date appears, tap the

Date

tab and make the changes.

Figure 3-18

Regional Settings Properties Screen - Date Tab

7.

Tap

Start > Programs > Save Configuration

to save the new settings in the MK2200 configuration

(mkconfig.reg) file.

Memory Allocation

To change memory allocation settings:

1.

Tap

Start > Settings > Control Panel > System > Memory

.

Figure 3-19

System Properties Screen - Memory Tab

2.

On the

Memory

tab, adjust the memory allocation as desired using the slider.

3.

Tap

OK.

NOTE

Changing these settings using the Control Panel does not persist them through cold boot cycles. To set allocation to persist through cold boot cycles, or for more information on this topic,

see

Memory Management on page 8-10

.

3 - 32 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 4

Chapter 4

Chapter 4

Remote Device Manager

Remote Device Manager

Overview

The Symbol Remote Device Manager (RDM) v 2.4.X is a simple, menu-based Windows

®

utility for streamlining large and small site deployments. This utility allows a user to remotely stage (discover and configure) and monitor networked MK2200s.

The RDM functionality falls into five categories:

Generating a device configuration file

Performing discovery (detection) of devices on a network

Enabling automated staging/configuring/provisioning of networked devices

Remote monitoring

Remotely initiating device functionality.

Generating Configuration Files

Use the

Create Local Configuration File

feature of RDM to create an MK2200 configuration file (

mkconfig.reg

).

When loaded onto the device, this file customizes the MK2200 communication settings, application settings, date and time setup, and much more.

After generating the mkconfig.reg file, load it into the MK2200

Application

folder (

Desktop/My

Computer/Application

) and reboot the device. The MK2200 reads the mkconfig.reg file upon power-up and configures its parameters according to the settings defined in the mkconfig.reg file. If the MK2200 loses power, the parameters set within the configuration file persist and are re-established at the next power up.

See

Creating a Configuration File on page 4-12

for more information.

4 - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Performing Discovery (Detection) of Devices on a Network

The RDM discovers and displays the IP addresses of MK2200s on different subnets to which the host computer is connected, provided that the broadcast IP address is set correctly. See

Setting RDM Options on page 4-14

for more details.

The RDM utility broadcasts a request for discovery, and each MK2200 responds with its IP address. The RDM utility displays all responding MK2200 IP addresses on the main

RDM

screen.

The RDM can remotely initiate actions, such as playing a sound file, on the discovered device to help locate it in a store environment.

NOTE

RDM performance and consistency when performing discovery on a network are directly related to network reliability.

Automated Staging/Configuring/Provisioning of Networked Devices

The RDM can load a device configuration file (mkconfig.reg) onto an MK2200 remotely. This process is automated and does not require user intervention.

For details, see

Creating a Configuration File on page 4-12

and

Downloading the Configuration File to the

MK2200 Using the RDM on page 4-14

.

Remote Monitoring

Use the RDM to determine device-specific information. After performing discovery, select an MK2200 from the discovery list box to retrieve information to view:

Device general information

Operating System versions

Storage information

Partition information

Application versions

RF Signal Strength.

See

Monitoring MK2200s on a Network on page 4-16

for more information.

Remotely Initiating Select Device Functionality

Use the RDM to remotely initiate select functionality on MK2200s. After performing discovery, highlight desired devices from the discovery list box to initiate remote functionality on these devices, such as launching AirBeam

Smart or rebooting the device.

Remote Device Manager 4 - 3

Installing the Symbol Remote Device Manager

The RDM is available for download from the Symbol Developer Zone web site (http://devzone.symbol.com/).

1.

Download the

Symbol Remote Device Manager

install file and save it on the host computer hard drive.

2.

Select

Start > Run

from the Windows

®

task bar.

3.

Using the

Browse

button, locate the

Symbol Remote Device Manager

install file and select

OK

.

4.

The

Symbol Remote Device Manager First Install Screen

provides copyright information. Select

Next

to continue.

Figure 4-1

Symbol Remote Device Manager First Install Screen

5.

The

Symbol Remote Device Manager Select Installation Folder

screen provides the directory information for the installation. Enter a new install path or accept the default path, and select users. Click

Next

to continue.

Figure 4-2

Symbol Remote Device Manager Select Installation Folder

4 - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

6.

The

Symbol Remote Device Manager Confirm Installation

screen requests to confirm installation. Click

Next

to continue.

Figure 4-3

Symbol Remote Device Manager Confirm Installation

7.

The

Symbol Remote Device Manager Installation Complete

screen confirms the installation was

completed successfully. Click

Close

to exit.

Figure 4-4

Symbol Remote Device Manager Installation Complete

Remote Device Manager 4 - 5

Symbol Remote Device Manager Main Screen

To open the Symbol Remote Device Manager on the host computer, select

Start > Programs > Symbol Remote

Device Manager > Symbol Remote Device Manager

.

Figure 4-5

MK2200 Symbol Remote Device Manager

Symbol Remote Device Manager Menus

Use the menus on the

Symbol Remote Device Manager

(RDM) main screen to perform the functions in

Table

4-1

.

Table 4-1

Symbol Remote Device Manager Menu Items

Menu Item

File Menu

Function

Exits the Symbol Remote Device Manager.

Exit

Edit Menu

Select All

Select None

View Menu

Selects all MK2200s in the list.

Deselects all MK2200s in the list.

Refresh (Discover

Remote Devices)

Locates all MK2200s on the network and displays them in the list box.

4 - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table 4-1

Symbol Remote Device Manager Menu Items (Continued)

Menu Item

Device Information

Function

Displays information on the selected MK2200. See

MK2200s on a Network on page 4-16

.

Monitoring

RF Signal Strength Launches the RF Signal Analyzer which displays RF signal strength. Only RF MK2200s running Mobile Companion support this feature. RF MK2200s running Aegis Client do not support this.

View Filter Parameters

Set Default Column

Width

Actions Menu

Locate Device

Toggles on/off the Filter Parameters panel of the RDM.

Sets the default column width for fields displayed in main

RDM

screen.

Ping Device

Delete Device

Initiates the device locating mechanism. Select an option for locating the device from the sub menu:

Select

Display Color Screen

to display a color screen on the target device.

Select

Emit Sound

to play a high-pitched sound clip from the target device.

Select

Display Color and Emit Sound

to invoke both the previous two mechanisms in the target device.

Select

Terminate Locator

mode to terminate the locating mechanism. This terminates the current locator mode before initiating another locator mode.

Ping the selected device. If the device cannot be reached, an error message displays.

Removes the selected device from the list of discovered devices.

This only deletes the devices highlighted in gray.

Cold Boot

Warm Boot

Launch AirBeam

Cold boots the selected/highlighted MK2200(s). Allow approximately one minute for the device(s) to reboot and reconnect, then select

View > Refresh

to verify the devices rebooted successfully.

Warm boots the selected/highlighted MK2200(s). Allow approximately one minute for the device(s) to reboot and reconnect, then select

View > Refresh

to verify the devices rebooted successfully.

Launches the AirBeam version 2.16 application on the

selected/highlighted MK2200(s). See

Setting RDM Options on page 4-14

.

Tools Menu

Create Local

Configuration File

Creates a new configuration file and allows saving it to the PC

hard drive. See

Creating a Configuration File on page 4-12

.

Remote Device Manager 4 - 7

Table 4-1

Symbol Remote Device Manager Menu Items (Continued)

Menu Item Function

Open Local

Configuration File

Opens an existing configuration file that resides on the host computer.

Retrieve Remote

Configuration File

Manage Static IP

Address

Opens a configuration file that resides on the selected/highlighted

MK2200.

Push Configuration File Downloads a selected configuration file to the selected/highlighted

MK2200(s). See

Downloading the Configuration File to the

MK2200 Using the RDM on page 4-14

.

Opens the

See

Manage Static IP Address

window.

Managing Static IP Addresses on page 4-21

.

Custom DHCP Options

Options

Displays the

Customer DHCP Options

window. Use this window to add/edit/remove DHCP options available within the Symbol RDM.

Customizes Remote Device Manager options such as FTP

security and broadcast IP address. See

Setting RDM Options on page 4-14

.

4 - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Symbol Remote Device Manager Toolbar

Use the toolbar on the

RDM

main screen to perform the functions listed under the menu items in

Table 4-2

.

Table 4-2

Symbol RDM Toolbar Components

Component

Tool Bar

Description

Contains buttons that invoke most common functions of RDM.

Discover all devices on the network and display the Discovered Devices list. To stop discovery, click the

Cancel

Discovery

button.

Deselect all devices.

Select all devices listed in the Discovered

Devices list.

Retrieve the configuration file from the selected device.

Push the configuration file to the selected device(s).

Create an MK2200 device configuration file using the RDM.

Abort pushing the configuration file to device(s).

Retrieve device specific information.

Cold boot the selected device.

Turns on and off the

Filter Parameters panel.

Row Colors

The Symbol RDM uses a color scheme to indicate the state of the MK2200 devices.

Green

Yellow

Gray

Red

Color Status

Successfully retrieved/pushed configuration file.

Selected for downloading a configuration file.

Device is inactive. The device may be booting up or is no longer in the same subnet.

The retrieval/pushing of the configuration file is unsuccessful.

Remote Device Manager 4 - 9

State Icons

The Symbol RDM uses a color scheme on the State Icons (the left most column) to indicate the state of the

MK2200 devices.

Color of Icon Status

Successfully discovered device.

Successfully retrieved/pushed configuration file.

Device is selected for downloading a configuration file.

Device is inactive. The device may be booting up or is no longer in the same subnet.

The retrieval/pushing of the configuration file is unsuccessful.

Filtering Parameters

Use the

Filter Parameters

fields on the

RDM

main screen to display only certain devices on the network.

Table

4-3

describes these fields.

Table 4-3

Filter Parameters Fields

Menu Item

Product Group

Function

Select a product group to display.

Product

Config Group 1

Config Group 2

Select product model to display. See

Identification on page 3-12

Select an assigned configuration group to display. To set configuration groups, use the System Configuration feature of

RDM or System Menu. See

Identification on page 3-12

.

Select a second assigned configuration group to display. To set configuration groups, use the System Configuration feature of

RDM or System Menu. See

Identification on page 3-12

.

.

4 - 10 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table 4-3

Filter Parameters Fields (Continued)

Menu Item

Location

Function

Select a device location to display. To set locations, use the

System Configuration feature of RDM or System Menu. See

Identification on page 3-12

.

Address Types

IP Address

Select

Static

to display devices found in

Manage Static IP Address

list (see

Managing Static IP Addresses on page 4-21

), or

Discovered

to display all devices not in the Manage Static IP

Address list (see

Enabling DHCP on page 4-25

).

Enter IP address range to filter devices within the range.

Set the filtering parameters and click

Apply Filter

to apply the filters in RDM.

Click

Clear Filter

to remove the filtering parameters.

Filtering Example

In

Figure 4-6

, the filter parameter is set to a configuration group called

Technical

to isolate a device used in the

Technical department. When you click

Apply Filter

, the RDM scans the discovered devices list and filters out only the devices that fall into that configuration group. Use filters to quickly locate the devices.

Figure 4-6

Symbol Remote Device Manager Filtering

Remote Device Manager 4 - 11

Electronic Serial Number

The MK22XX has an electronic serial number accessible via network query. This information appears in RDM’s

Serial Number

column. A sample serial number is M1J37B90R. Note that only devices manufactured with

Windows CE .NET 4.2 support this.

4 - 12 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Creating a Configuration File

To create a new configuration file:

1.

From the Remote Device Manager, select

Tools > Create Local Configuration File

from the menu bar.

2.

In the

Domains

window, select the applicable domain/product (MK2200) and click

OK

. This opens the

MK2200 Configuration Utility

window.

3.

Make the necessary changes to the default values in the configuration file. See

Default Parameters on page 3-6

for all configuration options, which fall into the following configuration categories:

-

Configuration File Information - includes parameters related to version tracking of the mkconfig.reg file.

-

Applications

- includes parameters related to Internet Explorer.

-

Communications

- includes parameters for wired MK2200s related to Onboard Wired Ethernet.

-

System Configuration

- includes parameters related to MK2200 system settings such as backlight intensity, volume and sounds, date/time, button configurations, regional settings, and user applications.

-

Update

- includes parameters related to the onboard FTP Client.

See

Figure 4-7

for a sample screen, and

Data Entry Formats on page 4-28

for

MK2200 Configuration

Utility

window data entry field types used when changing configuration options.

Figure 4-7

Changing Configuration Parameters Example: Internet Explorer Start Page

4.

Select

File > Save As

.

5.

In the

Save

window, specify the file name and location, then click

OK

.

NOTE

The default folder is C:\Program Files\Symbol\Configuration Utility\MK2200 Configuration

Files. The default file name is mkconfig.reg. Assign the file any name, but rename the file mkconfig.reg before transferring it to the MK2200.

Remote Device Manager 4 - 13

Modifying an Existing Configuration File

To edit an existing configuration file:

1.

From the RDM on the host computer, choose

Tools > Open Local Configuration File

to open the

MK2200

Configuration Utility

window.

2.

Select a configuration file (with a .reg extension) to edit and click

OK

.

NOTE

Only open files created by the RDM, System Menu, or Save Configuration. Loading other registry files can cause file corruption.

3.

Make the necessary changes to the default values in the configuration file. See

Default Parameters on page 3-6

for these options. Also see

Figure 4-7

for a sample screen, and

Data Entry Formats on page 4-28

for

MK2200 Configuration Utility

window data entry field types used when changing configuration options.

4.

To save the changes, choose

File > Save

to overwrite the old file, or select

Save As

to specify a new name for the file. Note that you cannot change the Domain (product) of an existing configuration file.

Retrieving and Modifying a Configuration File from an MK2200

1.

From the

RDM

screen, select the device from which to retrieve the configuration file.

2.

Select

Tools > Retrieve Remote Configuration File

to retrieve the MK2200 configuration file from the

MK2200 to the host computer. This launches the

MK2200 Configuration Utility

window of the RDM. If a configuration file is unavailable in the device, RDM opens the

MK2200 Configuration Utility

window with the default factory settings.

3.

Make the necessary changes to the default values in the configuration file. See

Default Parameters on page 3-6

for these options. Also see

Figure 4-7

for a sample screen, and

Data Entry Formats on page 4-28

for

MK2200 Configuration Utility

window data entry field types used when changing configuration options.

4.

In the

MK2200 Configuration Utility

window, select

File > Save to Remote Device

to save the changes and transfer the updated configuration file back to the original MK2200.

5.

Alternatively, configure the RDM to automatically cold boot the MK2200 device after a download completes. Select

Tools > Options

to open the

RDM Options

screen, and check

Auto reboot after download

.

NOTE

To reboot manually instead, in the RDM, select the MK2200 device, then select

Actions > Cold Boot

.

Allow approximately one minute for the MK2200 to reboot and reconnect, then select

View > Refresh

to verify the device rebooted successfully.

Cloning an MK2200 Configuration File to Multiple MK2200s

To use one MK2200 configuration file to configure other MK2200s:

1.

In the RDM, select the MK2200 with the configuration file to use.

2.

Select

Tools > Retrieve Remote Configuration File

to transfer the configuration file to the host computer and open the

MK2200 Configuration Utility

window.

3.

In the

MK2200 Configuration Utility

window, select

File > Save As

.

4.

Specify the location for the configuration file to be saved on the host PC, and click

OK

.

4 - 14 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

5.

Select the MK2200 devices to be updated from the

Discovered Devices

list.

6.

Select

Tools > Push Configuration File

option to upload the configuration file to the selected MK2200s (see

Downloading the Configuration File to the MK2200 Using the RDM

).

Downloading the Configuration File to the MK2200 Using the RDM

To “push” the file to the MK2200(s):

1.

In the Symbol Remote Device Manager (RDM) window, select/highlight the MK2200(s) to receive the configuration file.

2.

Select

Tools > Push Configuration File

.

3.

Select the configuration file to send, then click

Open

.

The row color of the selected device changes to yellow to indicate that the MK2200 device is ready to receive a configuration file through the RDM. When the download completes, the row color changes to

green. See

Row Colors on page 4-8

and

State Icons on page 4-9

.

4.

If the

Auto reboot after download

option is disabled, manually cold boot the MK2200(s). In the

RDM

main screen, select the MK2200(s) to reboot, then select

Actions > Cold Boot

. Allow approximately one minute for the MK2200 to reboot and reconnect, then select

View > Refresh

to verify the device rebooted successfully.

NOTE

Setting the device FTP options to Enable Anonymous Login and Disable User Authentication allows anonymous login and retrieval of files through FTP connection. However, modifying/adding files is not allowed for non-anonymous users. Therefore, do not enter a user name and password in RDM’s options panel to download a file to the device through RDM if these FTP settings are in place.

Setting RDM Options

If desired, set the following Symbol Remote Device Manager (RDM) options from the

Options

window. These settings apply for the RDM:

AirBeam parameters

FTP security

Timeouts

Auto-refresh

3rd party application data

Other options (e.g., auto-reboot, device discovery).

Remote Device Manager 4 - 15

To set options:

1.

In the

RDM

main screen, select

Tools > Options

to open the

Options

window.

Figure 4-8

Symbol Remote Device Manager Options Window

2.

Set desired options:

-

Set

AirBeam Parameters

for launching AirBeam. For more information on AirBeam command line parameters, refer to the

AirBeam Package Builder Product Reference Guide

.

-

Set the FTP user ID in the

User ID

field and password in the

Password

field for accessing an FTP server. Leave this blank to enable anonymous FTP login. See

Downloading the Configuration File to the MK2200 Using the RDM on page 4-14

and

FTP Server on page 3-23

.

-

Enter a value for

Device discovery

(the duration for sending network queries for detecting MK2200 devices) and

Query timeout

(the timeout period before the next query).

-

Check the

Enable auto-refresh every

option to enable automatic refresh/discovery of devices and specify the time period in its text box. This automatically refreshes the

Discovered Devices

list after a cold/warm boot or after a configuration file push.

-

In the

Application 1

and

Application 2

fields, enter the names of applications loaded on the device that the RDM must monitor. For example, to track the Web Kiosk Software Suite version, enter

Web_Kiosk

SoftwareSuite

into

Application 1

.

-

Check

Auto reboot after download

to reboot the device after a successful configuration file push.

-

Check

Device discovery on open

to perform device discovery automatically when the RDM launches.

-

Check

Enable RDM Password

to prompt for a User Name and Password for using the RDM. Enter the user name and password in the

RDM Login

screen. RDM prompts for the user name and password when launched.

4 - 16 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

-

Specify the

Broadcast IP Address

, used in discovering devices on the network. The default value is

255.255.255.255. This causes discovery of all device in all network interfaces attached to a single computer (multi-homed computer).

3.

Click

OK

to save the changes and close the

Options

window.

4.

Click

Defaults

to load the default settings for the RDM.

5.

Click

Cancel

to exit the

RDM Options

screen without saving the settings.

Monitoring MK2200s on a Network

Use the RDM to remotely monitor MK2200s connected through a network connection. After performing discovery, double-click on an MK2200 from the discovery list, or click on the MK2200 in the list and select

View

> Device Information

from the RDM menu:

View device general information. See

Device Information - Info Tab: Detected Device Information on page 4-17

.

View software version information, such as applications, drivers, OS, and platform. See

Device

Information - Software Tab: Version Information on page 4-18

.

View RAM and flash memory usage for the selected device. See

Device Information - Storage Tab:

Memory Availability and Usage on page 4-19

.

View partition information for the selected MK2200. See

Managing Static IP Addresses on page 4-21

.

Use the up and down arrow keys to navigate through the discovered devices to view information.

Click

Refresh

to refresh the device properties list.

Click

Generate Report

to place the information displayed in the tabs into a printable file.

Remote Device Manager 4 - 17

Device Information - Info Tab: Detected Device Information

The

Info

tab displays identification information about the selected MK2200. Also see

Performing Discovery

(Detection) of Devices on a Network on page 4-2

Figure 4-9

MK2200 Remote Device Monitor - Info Tab

4 - 18 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Device Information - Software Tab: Version Information

The

Software

tab displays the applications, operating system, monitor driver, and platform, and their version information for the selected MK2200.

Figure 4-10

MK2200 Remote Device Monitor - Software Tab

Remote Device Manager 4 - 19

Device Information - Storage Tab: Memory Availability and Usage

The

Storage

tab displays storage areas on the selected MK2200, their physical size, and available free memory.

Figure 4-11

MK2200 Remote Device Monitor - Storage Tab

4 - 20 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Device Information - Partitions Tab

The

Partitions

tab displays the number and size of the storage areas on the selected MK2200.

Figure 4-12

MK2200 Remote Device Monitor - Partitions Tab

Remote Device Manager 4 - 21

Setting a Static IP Address

To set a static IP address for a wired device:

1.

In the

MK2200 Configuration Utility

window, select

IP Address

under the appropriate adapter: Onboard

Wired Ethernet.

Figure 4-13

Setting a Static IP Address

2.

In the text box, enter the IP address.

3.

Also select and define the adapter's

Default Gateway

and

Subnet Mask

.

4.

Optionally, select and define the

DNS Server(s)

and

DNS Domain

.

5.

Ensure that

Enable DHCP

is disabled (de-select its check box).

6.

Save the changes.

Managing Static IP Addresses

Specify the static IP address of an MK2200, which is on a different subnet than the Symbol Remote Device

Manager PC, to establish a connection and still be managed by the RDM. This causes the RDM to list the devices and their IP addresses, without performing discovery, in the

RDM

main screen.

For this to occur, the MK2200 that is on a different subnet than the RDM must have a static (unchanging) IP address during the remote management session.

This is useful when MK2200s are on more than one subnet, when bandwidth is a consideration, or when

MK2200s are connected over a WAN. For example, if the MK2200 RF and wired Ethernet devices are on different subnets, the Remote Device Manager can still manage all devices.

4 - 22 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Adding Static IP Addresses

1.

In the Symbol Remote Device Manager, select

Tools > Manage Static Addresses

.

Figure 4-14

Manage Static Addresses Window

2.

Enter the IP address and the name, and click

Add

. Repeat this to enter other static IP addresses.

3.

Click

OK

to save the changes.

Remote Device Manager 4 - 23

Modifying Static IP Addresses

1.

In the Symbol Remote Device Manager, select

Tools > Manage Static IP Addresses

.

Figure 4-15

Modifying Static Addresses

2.

Select the IP address and click

Modify

.

3.

Change the appropriate settings and click

Update

to update the static IP addresses list.

Click

Discard

to discard the modifications.

4.

Click

OK

to save the changes.

4 - 24 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Deleting Static IP Addresses

1.

In the Symbol Remote Device Manager, select

Tools > Manage Static IP Addresses

.

Figure 4-16

Deleting Static Addresses

2.

Select the IP address to delete, and click

Delete

. Repeat this to delete other static IP addresses.

3.

Click

OK

to save the changes.

Remote Device Manager 4 - 25

DHCP Configuration

Familiarity with Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) options is required to edit options and save them to the configuration file.

NOTE

Do not use the System Menu or RDM to enable DHCP receive options 1, 3, 6, 15, 44, 46, 47, 66 and 67.

They are already enabled in dhcpoptions.reg as a part of the AirBeam package. Refer to AirBeam documentation for this configuration.

Enabling DHCP

Enabling DHCP configures a specific network adapter to acquire its IP address and other network parameters through DHCP. DHCP options determine what additional data is sent to and received from the DHCP server.

To enable DHCP:

1.

In the

MK2200 Configuration Utility

window, select

Enable DHCP

under the appropriate adapter: Onboard

Wired Ethernet.

Figure 4-17

Enable DHCP Window

2.

Check

Enable DHCP

.

NOTE

If enabling DHCP, you can set DHCP Server; however, this is usually not required. Do not set any other parameters under Communications.

If enabling DHCP to resolve addresses for a network adapter, optionally specify which data fields are sent from or received by the MK2200 (DHCP options) during DHCP transactions using that network adapter.

Some of the 256 available DHCP options are defined by the IETF in RFC-2132, and appear in the

MK2200

Configuration Utility

window when specifying DHCP options. If desired, add custom DHCP options to this list.

These custom option definitions are stored in the file

<install_dir>\dhcpoptions.reg

, which the RDM reads

4 - 26 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

upon launch. If using another computer to edit a configuration file that contains custom DHCP options, transfer the file

<install_dir>\dhcpoptions.reg

to this computer to view these custom options.

To change Send DHCP options:

1.

In the

MK2200 Configuration Utility

window, select

DHCP Options

under the appropriate adapter: Onboard

Wired Ethernet.

2.

Click

Edit Send Options

to view the

Send

window.

Figure 4-18

Send DHCP Window

3.

To add options to the configuration, select an option for the network adapter to receive from the

Available

Options

list.

4.

In the data field(s) in the

Static

area of the window, enter the data to send for this option. Click to add these options to the

Options to Receive

list.

5.

To add other Send DHCP options, repeat steps 3 and 4.

6.

To remove options from the configuration, select an option to remove from the

Options to Send

list. Click to move the option back to the

Available Options

list. Repeat this for each option to remove.

7.

Click

OK

to save the changes and close the

Send

window.

Remote Device Manager 4 - 27

Custom DHCP Options

Use the RDM to add/edit/remove custom DHCP options available within the RDM. Select

Tools > Custom

DHCP Options

.

Figure 4-19

Custom DHCP Options Screen

Adding Custom DHCP Options

Use the

Custom DHCP Options

window to add a new DHCP option.

1.

Select a code that is not currently used from the

Code

drop-down list.

2.

Enter the

Name

and

Description

for the custom DHCP option.

3.

Set the

Input Rules

.

4.

Click

OK

to submit the entered settings in the RDM.

Editing Custom DHCP Options

1.

From the

Code

drop-down list, select the custom DHCP option to edit.

2.

Make the appropriate changes.

3.

Click

OK

to submit the entered settings in the RDM.

Removing Custom DHCP Options

1.

From the

Code

drop-down list, select the custom DHCP option to remove.

2.

Delete the

Name

and

Description

.

3.

Click

OK

to save in the RDM.

4 - 28 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Updating the RDM on the Host Computer

To update the RDM:

1.

Use the Windows

®

Add/Remove a Program

utility to remove the RDM from the host computer.

2.

Install an updated RDM. See

Installing the Symbol Remote Device Manager on page 4-3

.

Restoring Configuration Parameter Defaults

Some fields have a default value. To restore default values, choose one of the following items from the

MK2200

Configuration Utility

window:

Select a parameter, then select

Edit > Restore Default

to restore the current field to its default.

Select

Edit > Restore All Defaults

to restore all parameter default settings.

Save the changes.

Data Entry Formats

The RDM uses standard data entry formats, depending on the data type:

Check Box: Used for true or false values. An "X" in the check box selects the function. Tap the box to check or uncheck.

Text Data Entry Box: Requires text entry. Examples are IP address, domain name, or server name.

Numeric Data Entry Box: Requires numeric entries, in hexadecimal (base 16) or decimal (base 10) notation. Hex values must be preceded by "0x".

Drop-down List: Select a single option. The stored parameter value may be different than the text displayed.

Bit Fields: Multiple items with check boxes. If desired, select multiple items (from none to all). Each selected item affects the value stored, which is a single number, so the selections will not match the mkconfig.reg file.

Multiple Text: Enter multiple free-form strings. Click

Enter

on the keyboard to create a new string.

Multiple text values are not represented in the mkconfig.reg file as text, so the value entered is not recognizable in the mkconfig.reg file.

External-type: For each different external type, an associated DLL manipulates what is stored in the

Registry (mkconfig.reg) and how it is displayed in the Configuration Utility/System Menu.

The Configuration Utility/System Menu loads the relevant DLL when an External-type is found in the metadata file for the particular Registry type. The DLL should have two standard methods: input and output.

When a registry entry of External- type is stored, the text in the text box is passed to the output method of the DLL which translates the data accordingly and writes it to the Registry file. When retrieving a Registry

Remote Device Manager 4 - 29

entry, the DLL invokes the input method and translates the data back to a valid form. It is displayed in the

Configuration Utility /System Menu.

All validation for the value entered is done through the DLL. No validation is done through the

Configuration Utility/System Menu. This method is used in encrypting and decrypting WEP keys.

4 - 30 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 5

Chapter 5

Chapter 5

Transferring Files to the MK2200

Transferring Files to the MK2200

Overview

Use the following tools to copy files to the MK2200:

ActiveSync

FTP Server (see

FTP Server on page 8-11

)

AirBEAM version 2.16 (see

AirBeam Package Builder Product Reference Guide).

ActiveSync

The MK2200 communicates with a host computer using Microsoft

®

ActiveSync (version 3.7.1 or higher). Use

USB ActiveSync to transfer data between a host computer and the MK2200.

When installed on the MK2200, ActiveSync software allows copying and pasting (rather than synchronizing) files between the MK2200 and host computer.

NOTE

While an application is running, access to ActiveSync can be enabled or disabled using either RDM or the System Menu under System Configuration - ActiveSync -

EnableActiveSync.

Installing ActiveSync

To install ActiveSync on the host computer, download the latest version of the software from http://www.microsoft.com. Refer to the installation instructions included with the ActiveSync software.

Use ActiveSync (version 3.7.1 or higher) to synchronize the information on the MK2200 with the information on the host computer. Changes made on the MK2200 or host computer appear in both places after synchronization.

NOTE

The MK2200 implementation of ActiveSync 3.7.1 does not support ActiveSync Backup and

Restore functionality and automatic information synchronization.

5 - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Connecting the MK2200 to the Host Computer

To configure ActiveSync for Guest access (suitable for copying files between the host computer and the

MK2200):

1.

Connect the RJ-45 connector of the ActiveSync Developer Cable, p/n 25-64626-01R, to the RS-485 port on the MK2200 (see

Figure 1-3 on page 1-5

). Connect the other end of the cable to a USB port on the host computer.

2.

If the

Get Connected

window does not appear, on the host computer, select

Start > Programs > Microsoft

ActiveSync

.

Figure 5-1

Get Connected Window

3.

Select

Next

. The host computer and the MK2200 attempt to synchronize. The

New Partnership

window displays.

Figure 5-2

New Partnership Window

4.

Click

No

and then

Next

. The

New Partnership/Name Your Device

window displays.

Transferring Files to the MK2200 5 - 3

5.

Click

Next

. The

Microsoft ActiveSync Guest Connected

window displays.

Figure 5-3

Microsoft ActiveSync Guest Connected Window

To download files (such as the mkconfig.reg file) from the host computer to the MK2200, use Windows

Explorer to copy the files. Then, select

File > Explore

on the ActiveSync window, locate the folder to upload the files to, and paste the files.

For more information about ActiveSync, start ActiveSync on the host computer, then refer to ActiveSync

Help

.

5 - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 6

Chapter 6

Chapter 6

Web Kiosk Software Suite

Web Kiosk Software Suite

Overview

The Web Kiosk Software Suite (Web KSS) is a comprehensive browser solution that demonstrates the many capabilities of the MK2200 MicroKiosk. For software developers, production quality HTML source code is included as a reference implementation for creating custom solutions.

Web Kiosk Software Suite Features

The Web Kiosk Software Suite provides a sample retail application that demonstrates the functionality of the

MK2200 in a retail environment, and includes Customer and Store Operations applications.

The

Customer Application

screens provide:

Advertising (Attract Mode)

Price verification

Music listen station

Alternate language information

Printing capability

Magstripe reading (MSR)

Loyalty program

Guided selling tool with audio prompts

Gift registry registration.

The

Store Operations

screens provide:

Time and attendance (clocking in)

Full screen video

In-store messaging (text, voice, and video)

Recording a voicemail response

Voicemail playback

2D bar code scanning and display data

Scan engine deactivation / reactivation

6 - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Weekly employee work schedule

Calculator.

Customer Facing

Price

Verification

Loyalty

Program

Guided

Selling Tool

Music

Station

Gift Registry

Advertising

Payment via MSR

Alternate

Language

Support

Employee Facing

Time and

Attendance

Work

Schedule

Video

Training

Calculator

(Button Layout)

Messaging

System

2D Bar Code

Scanning

Voicemail

Recording

Web Kiosk Software Suite

The Web Kiosk Software Suite MK2000WEBKSS_X.XX.zip and source code are available at http://devzone.symbol.com

. The Web Kiosk Software Suite does not require external connectivity to run.

Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

The Web Kiosk Software Suite uses the bar codes in

Appendix D, Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

to demonstrate MK2200 capabilities.

Installing the Web Kiosk Software Suite

To install the Web Kiosk Software Suite when the MK2200 is set to launch another application on power-up,

see

Accessing the Windows® CE Desktop

.

Accessing the Windows

®

CE Desktop

To prevent launching an application on power-up:

1.

Perform a cold boot: press and hold buttons

B

and

C

on the MK2200 (see

Figure 1-1 on page 1-3

) until the display goes blank (typically 15 seconds), then release the buttons.

2.

To prevent the MK2200 from entering an application, simultaneously press and hold buttons

A

and

D

just after the blue

Performing System Initialization (Phase 1)

screen displays, and before the message changes to

Phase 2

. Release the buttons.

3.

When the

Enter Password

prompt appears, enter

DDBAC

, then touch

OK

or simultaneously press the

A

and

B

buttons for Enter.

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 3

The MK2200 enters Protected Mode and the Windows

®

CE desktop displays.

Deleting the Current Web Kiosk Software Suite Version

1.

Double-tap the

My Computer

icon on the CE desktop.

2.

Double-tap the

Application

folder.

3.

Select and delete the

MK2000WebKioskSoftwareSuite

folder.

4.

Select and delete the

mkconfig.reg

file.

5.

Select and delete the

Web_KioskSoftwareSuite.reg

file.

NOTE

Use Delete in the Files menu to remove the files.

Installing a New Web Kiosk Software Suite Version

1.

Create a folder on the host computer called

SoftwareSuite

.

2.

Download the MK2000 Web Kiosk Software Suite MK2000WEBKSS_X.XX.zip from http://devzone.symbol.com

,

saving it to the desktop. The downloaded files are compressed in a .zip file.

3.

Extract all files to the

SoftwareSuite

folder to create the following files and folders:

-

MK2000WebKioskSoftwareSuite

folder

-

MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

-

mkconfig.reg

-

retry.html

-

Web_KioskSoftwareSuite.reg.

4.

Copy the following files and folders onto a PC card:

-

MK2000WebKioskSoftwareSuite

folder

-

mkconfig.reg

-

retry.html

-

Web_KioskSoftwareSuite.reg.

5.

Insert the PC card into the PC card slot in the MK2200. See

Figure 1-2 on page 1-4

. To access PC card contents, use the

Storage Card

folder located in

My Computer

.

6.

Double-tap the

My Computer

icon.

7.

Double-tap the

Application

folder.

8.

Use the copy function to copy the folder and files from the

My Computer\Storage Card

folder into the

My

Computer\Application

folder.

9.

Reboot the MK2200 to launch the new version of the Web Kiosk Software Suite

.

NOTE

Alternatively, use an ActiveSync connection to transfer files from the host computer to the

MK2200.

6 - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Disabling and Restoring the Web Kiosk Software Suite

1.

To prevent the MK2200 from entering an application, simultaneously hold down buttons

A

and

D

just after the blue

Performing System Initialization (Phase 1)

screen displays, and before the message changes to

Phase 2

. Release the buttons.

2.

When the

Enter Password

prompt appears, enter

DDBAC

, then touch

OK

on the MK2200 screen or simultaneously press the

A

and

B

buttons for Enter.

The MK2200 enters Protected Mode and the Windows

®

CE desktop displays.

3.

Double tap the

My Computer

icon.

4.

Double tap the

Application

folder.

5.

Use the cut function to cut

mkconfig.reg

from the

My Computer\Application

folder.

6.

Double tap the

MK2000WebKioskSoftwareSuite

folder and paste the

mkconfig.reg

file into this folder.

7.

Reboot the MK2200. The Windows

®

CE desktop displays.

8.

To restore the Web Kiosk Software Suite, move the

mkconfig.reg

file back to the

My Computer\Application

folder.

Starting and Exiting the Web Kiosk Software Suite

Before launching the Web Kiosk Software Suite, print out the

Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes on page

D-1

used to demonstrate MK2200 features. For sample source code that demonstrates automatic MK2200 startup from a browser application, refer to the

MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file, which is part of

MK2000WEBKSS_X.XX.zip.

To launch the Web Kiosk Software Suite automatically, apply power to the MK2200 and allow the boot sequence to proceed uninterrupted. To exit the Web Kiosk Software Suite and access the Windows

®

CE

Desktop, see

Accessing the Windows® CE Desktop on page 6-2

.

Web Kiosk Software Suite Structure

The Web Kiosk Software Suite

Customer Application

screens are for customer use, and the

Store Operations

screens are for store employee access only. Use the

Employee Badge on page D-7

to access the

Store

Operations

screens. These screens use the four programmable buttons and/or virtual touch screen buttons

(displayed over the four function buttons).

The

Customer Application

screens demonstrate the customer support features.

Main Menu Bar on page 6-5

Scanning Bar Codes on page 6-5

Attract Mode on page 6-6

Price Verification on page 6-7

Price Verification Menu Bar on page 6-8

Printing on page 6-8

Loyalty Program on page 6-10

Guided Selling Tool (Select Ink Cartridge) on page 6-11

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 5

Gift Registry on page 6-14

.

The

Store Operations Screen on page 6-16

demonstrates sample store operations that the MK2200 supports, including:

Work Schedule Screen on page 6-17

Calculator on page 6-17

Scan a 2D Bar Code Screen on page 6-18

In-Store Messaging on page 6-18

-

Voicemail Options Screen on page 6-19

-

Voicemail Playback Screen on page 6-20

-

Voicemail Recording Screen on page 6-20

-

Text Messaging Screen on page 6-21

-

Video Message Screen on page 6-22

.

Customer Application Screens

Main Menu Bar

In Attract Mode (Idle Mode) the MK2200 displays the

Main Menu

bar titles above the programmable buttons.

Figure 6-1

Main Menu Bar

Scanning Bar Codes

Scan a bar code (on an item's SKU, employee badge, or loyalty card) from any point within the application where the scanner is active. However, 2D bar codes can only be scanned from the

Scan a 2D Bar Code

Screen on page 6-18

. For example, after a store employee scans an item's SKU for price lookup, the employee can scan an employee badge on the

Price Verification

screen to directly access the store operations menu.

For sample source code that demonstrates how to control the scan engine from a browser application, refer to the MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc file, which is part of the Web Kiosk Software Suite.

6 - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Attract Mode

The MK2200 Web Kiosk Software Suite enters Attract Mode after a period of inactivity, and displays a slide show. The

Main Menu

bar is visible during the slide show.

Figure 6-2

Slide Show Screens

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 7

Price Verification

The Web Kiosk Software Suite has three price verification screen formats:

Price Verification

screen (Loyalty Program enabled) - requires the Loyalty Program bar code to access special Loyalty Program product information.

Price Verification

screen (non-Loyalty Program) - displays standard non-Loyalty Program product information.

Price Verification

screen (Audio Enabled).

Scan the bar code

White Correction Fluid on page D-2

.

Figure 6-3

Loyalty Program Enabled, Price Verification Screen

Scan the bar code

White Correction Fluid on page D-2

.

Figure 6-4

Non-Loyalty Program, Price Verification Screen

CD Listening Station

The

Audio Enabled Price Verification

screen provides an audio listening station for the price verification screen.

Options include:

Two volume control buttons (louder/quieter)

Pause (two bar) button

Home

, returns to

Attract Mode on page 6-6

.

6 - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Scan the bar code

CD on page D-5

.

Figure 6-5

Audio Enabled Price Verification Screen

For sample source code that demonstrates volume control from a browser application, refer to the

MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file, which is part of the Web Kiosk Software Suite.

Price Verification Menu Bar

The

Price Verification Menu

bar appears directly over the function buttons and identifies the button functions

(when in the

Price Verification

screen).

Figure 6-6

Price Verification Menu Bar

The menu bar enables the following functionality:

Español (alternate language) - The title above the first button labels the alternate language (Spanish is the default). Once selected, screen text appears in the alternate language, including all screen titles, buttons titles, and price verification field titles. This language remains in effect until you exit the screen or select another button.

For sample source code that demonstrates alternative language support from a browser application, refer to the

MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file, which is part of the Web Kiosk Software Suite.

Print

- prints information shown on the screen. See

Printing on page 6-8

.

Loyalty Program - see

Loyalty Program on page 6-10

.

Home -

returns the MK2200 to

Attract Mode on page 6-6

.

Printing

Select the

Print

button to view the

Select Printer

screen, which offers the following options:

Print - prints bar codes, bitmaps, and/or text on the selected printer.

Down arrow

- scrolls down the printer list.

Troubleshoot - sets the printer in a mode to print on receipt paper. The default setting is label stock.

Home -

returns the MK2200 to

Attract Mode on page 6-6

.

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 9

Figure 6-7

Select Printer Screen

The Web Kiosk Software Suite supports printing using the Zebra QL220/320/420 or Zebra LP2834/2844 series printers, and demonstrates how to print on receipt stock (continuous printing) or label stock. The QL series printers support advanced printer monitoring functionality (see

Advanced Printer Monitoring Functionality on page 3-21

).

For sample source code that demonstrates printing from a browser application, refer to the

MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file.

Printer Errors

If an error occurs during printing to a Zebra QL printer, the error is highlighted in red as shown in

Figure 6-8

.

Figure 6-8

Printer Errors

6 - 10 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Loyalty Program

Select the

Loyalty Program

button from the

Main Menu

bar (see

page 6-5

) or from the

Price Verification

screen

(see page 6-7

) to view the

Loyalty Program

screen.

Figure 6-9

Loyalty Program Screen

Scan the

Loyalty Card on page D-7

for details about the customer’s Loyalty Program account status.

Figure 6-10

Loyalty Program Account Status

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 11

Guided Selling Tool (Select Ink Cartridge)

Select the Select Ink Cartridge button from the

Main Menu

bar (see

page 6-5 ) to view the

Print Cartridge

screen.

Figure 6-11

Print Cartridge Screen

The Web Kiosk Software Suite plays audio clips, on every screen of the guided selling screen flow, to explain instructions and available choices for the consumer.

Highlight one of the printers and select the

Select

button. The

Cartridge Type Selection

screen displays for the selected printer.

Figure 6-12

Cartridge Type Selection Screen

6 - 12 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Select either Black Cartridges or Color Cartridges to view information for that cartridge.

Figure 6-13

Cartridge Information Screen

For an MSR demonstration on MK2200s with an attached MSR, tap

Buy

.

Figure 6-14

MSR Payment Screen

Slide a credit card through the MK2200 MSR for sample payment authorization. No payment information from the credit card is sent or retained.

For sample source code that demonstrates MSR operation from a browser application, refer to the

MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file, which is part of the Web Kiosk Software Suite.

NOTE

If the MK2200 does not have an MSR attached, tap Back or Cancel to exit this screen, as no credit cards can be swiped.

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 13

KichenAid Mixer

The screen flow for KichenAid Mixer demonstrates the Web Kiosk Software Suite capability to handle sales of complex items.

Scan the bar code for

KichenAid Mixer on page D-6

, to move to the

KichenAid Mixer

screens.

Figure 6-15

KichenAid Mixer Screen

Color Options

- displays all available colors for KichenAid Mixer. See

KichenAid Mixer Color Selection

Screen on page 6-13

Print

- prints information shown on the screen. See

Printing on page 6-8

.

Accessories - displays the KichenAid Mixer accessories. See

KichenAid Mixer Accessories Screen on page 6-14

.

Home -

returns the MK2200 to

Attract Mode on page 6-6

.

Figure 6-16

KichenAid Mixer Color Selection Screen

Select the color from the list. The color of the KichenAid Mixer on the main screen changes accordingly.

6 - 14 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Select

Back

to move to the

KichenAid Mixer

screen.

Figure 6-17

KichenAid Mixer Accessories Screen

Select

Back

to move to the

KichenAid Mixer

screen.

Gift Registry

Use the voice guided

Gift Registry

screen flow to create/register user accounts. Select the

Gift Registry

button in the main menu of the Web Kiosk Software Suite to access the

Gift Registry

screen flow.

Enter First Name Screen

Figure 6-18

Enter First Name Screen

Enter the first name using the virtual keyboard. Select

Next

to move to the

Enter Last Name

screen.

Enter Last Name Screen

Figure 6-19

Enter Last Name Screen

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 15

Enter the last name using the virtual keyboard. Select

Next

to move to the

Enter Phone Number

screen.

Enter Phone Number

Figure 6-20

Enter Phone Number

Enter the phone number using the virtual keyboard. Select

Next

to move to the

Customer Information

screen.

Customer Information Screen

Use the

Customer Information

screen to confirm the entered information is correct.

Figure 6-21

Customer Information Screen

If there are any errors, select

Back

to return to the data entry screens. Otherwise select

Next

to complete the registration process. The following screen displays.

Figure 6-22

Registered Screen

The

Registered

screen message indicates the user data entered is in the system. Select

Next

or

Quit

to exit the gift registry process and return to Attract Mode.

6 - 16 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Store Operations Screen

Scan the

Employee Badge on page D-7

(5 digit code 128) to enter

Store Operations

mode. On this screen, the internal scan engine is disabled.

The

Store Operations

menu bar offers the following buttons:

Messages

(see

page 6-18

)

Work Schedule

(see page 6-18 )

Calculator

(see

page 6-17 )

Home -

returns the MK2200 to

Attract Mode on page 6-6

Video Player

(see

page 6-22

).

Figure 6-23

Store Operations Screen

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 17

Work Schedule Screen

Select

Work Schedule

from the

Store Operations

screen to view the

Work Schedule

screen, which displays an employee’s schedule.

Select

Back

to return to the

Store Operations Screen on page 6-16

.

Figure 6-24

Work Schedule Screen

Calculator

Select

Calculator

for an on-screen calculator.

Figure 6-25

Calculator

This screen and associated source code demonstrate an ideal button layout, based on an average user’s finger width. If using a stylus, the 6.4” VGA screen accommodates an alphanumeric keypad layout.

For sample source code that demonstrates numeric keypad operation from a browser application, refer to the

MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file, which is part of the Web Kiosk Software Suite.

6 - 18 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Scan a 2D Bar Code Screen

Select

Scan 2D from the Calculator

to view the

Scan a 2D Bar Code

screen, where store associates can scan

a 2D bar code such as a PDF417 code. See

2D Bar Code (PDF417) on page D-8

.

Selecting the

Scan 2D

button changes the scanning mode (laser scan pattern) from omni-directional (cyclone)

1D scanning to 2D scanning. When the MK2200 decodes a 2D bar code, it beeps and displays the bar code data.

Select

Home

to return to the

Store Operations

screen.

Figure 6-26

Scan a 2D Bar Code Screen

In-Store Messaging

Select

Messages

from the

Store Operations Screen on page 6-16

to view in-store messages. When the screen

displays, the first (most recent) item is highlighted. The

In-Store Messaging

view menu bar indicates current button functions.

Button options are:

Up arrow

- scrolls up the Item list.

Down arrow

- scrolls down the Item list.

Open - selects an item on the list:

-

Select a

Voicemail

message to view the

Voicemail Options Screen on page 6-19

.

-

Select a text message (in this demo “

Employee Bulletin

”) to view the

Text Messaging Screen on page

6-21

.

-

Select a full screen video message (in this demo “

Training Video

”) to view the

Video Message Screen on page 6-22

.

Home

- returns to the

Store Operations Screen on page 6-16

.

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 19

Figure 6-27

In-Store Messaging Screen

Voicemail Options Screen

Select a voicemail item from the

In-Store Messaging

screen to use the

Voicemail Options

screen to listen or respond to a voice message. Options include:

Right pointer

- plays the message.

Reply - records a message and plays it back by entering the

Voicemail Recording Screen on page 6-20

.

Delete - deletes the message.

Back - returns to the previous messaging screen.

Figure 6-28

Voicemail Options Screen

6 - 20 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Voicemail Playback Screen

Select an item from the

Voicemail Options

screen to use the

Voicemail Playback

screen to listen to and/or reply to a message. Options include:

First speaker

- increases volume.

Second speaker

- decreases volume.

Double bar

- pauses the recorded message.

Square

- returns to the

Voicemail Options Screen on page 6-19

.

Figure 6-29

Voicemail Playback Screen

Voicemail Recording Screen

Select

Reply

from the

Voicemail Options

screen to use the

Voicemail Response

screen to record a voice mail

reply using the MK2200 built in microphone (see

Figure 1-1 on page 1-3

), and play the message back. Options include:

Press to Record

- select and speak into the microphone to record a reply message. This records a .wav file using the MK2200 ActiveX object. The text on the button changes to

Stop;

select this to end recording. The text on the button changes back to

Press to Record

.

Right pointer

- plays the recorded .wav file message.

Send - sends the message.

Back - returns to the

Voicemail Options Screen on page 6-19

.

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 21

Figure 6-30

Voicemail Response Screen

For sample source code that demonstrates audio recording using the microphone from a browser application, refer to the MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc file, which is part of the Web Kiosk Software Suite.

Text Messaging Screen

Select a text-based message item from the

In-Store Messaging

screen to use the

Text Messaging

screen to view a text-based message. Options include:

Delete

- returns to the

In-Store Messaging on page 6-18

.

Back - returns to the

In-Store Messaging on page 6-18

.

Figure 6-31

Text Messaging Screen

6 - 22 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Video Message Screen

Select a video item from the

In-Store Messaging

screen to use the

Video Message

screen to view a training or informative full screen video. Options include:

First speaker

- increases volume.

Second speaker

- decreases volume.

Double bar

- pauses the video message.

Square

- terminates the video message and returns to the

In-Store Messaging on page 6-18

.

Figure 6-32

Video Message Screen

For sample source code that demonstrates playing video files from a browser application, refer to the

MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file, which is part of the Web Kiosk Software Suite.

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 23

Web KSS Source Code Index

Refer to the

MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file for sample source code for the following functionality.

Screen Layout

Touch screen "click" sound control:

-

Deactivating the click sound on the screen except where a button is located

-

Enabling a click sound for a virtual button.

Alternate language support:

-

Displaying screen text in Spanish.

Numeric keypad operation:

-

Setting up a numeric keypad.

Hiding the browser toolbars:

-

Internet Explorer toolbar

-

Windows

®

CE Start bar.

Setting up a

Price Verification

screen:

-

Routing UPC data

-

Laying out item pricing information on a screen.

Setting up an

Audio Guided

screen:

-

Adding an audio file for background audio instructions.

Setting up

Product Color Selection

screen:

-

Designing a color selection for products and items listed on the

Price Verification

screen (e.g., Kitchen

Aid Mixer).

Gathering customer information:

-

Using a two-frame solution to gather customer information (e.g., gift registry).

Dynamically relabeling buttons:

-

Selecting a button on the screen for a new screen and new buttons with new titles.

Virtual Keyboard.

Printing

Printing:

-

Bitmap

-

Bar code

-

Text.

QL printer error handling.

6 - 24 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Scan Engine

Scan engine control:

-

Turning the engine on and configuring

-

Turning the engine off.

Switching between omnidirectional and 2D

Embedding the Active X object in a hidden frame

Routing bar code data through symbology type to different locations.

Magstripe Reader

MSR control:

-

Turning on the MSR in unbuffered mode

-

Error handling

-

Setting time out values.

Reading and processing a credit card.

Four Physical Buttons

Enabling a button press sound

Disabling a button press sound.

Multi-Media Content

Microphone control:

-

Recording using microphone

-

Playing back recorded message.

Playing audio files:

-

Playing an audio file with media player

-

Controlling the volume while the file plays

-

Pausing playback

-

Closing an audio object.

Full screen video:

-

Playing a video file with media player

-

Controlling the volume while the file plays

-

Pausing playback.

Audio:

-

Played upon entering Web page.

Web Kiosk Software Suite 6 - 25

Advertising

Attract loop:

-

How the loop works

-

Changing the amount of time each image displays

-

Locating images.

Running a slide show.

Device Startup

Enabling automatic device setup (refer to the Web Kiosk Software Suite mkconfig.reg file)

How to enable device self-configuration/setup at power up.

Application Version Tracking

Tracking the Web Kiosk Software Suite version information (refer to the Web_KioskSoftwareSuite.reg file)

How to track application versions using a .reg file.

Network Down - Redirect to an Internal Error Page

Verifying a custom Kiosk IE error page

Setting a custom Kiosk IE error page

Activating a custom Kiosk IE error page.

6 - 26 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 7

Chapter 7

Chapter 7

C# Kiosk Software Suite

C# Kiosk Software Suite

Overview

The Symbol C# Kiosk Software Suite is a sample application for the C# environment available for the MK2200.

The MK2200 C# Kiosk Software Suite (MK2000C#KSS_X.XX.zip) is a comprehensive solution that demonstrates the many capabilities of the MK2200 Micro Kiosk.

For developers, C# production quality source code is provided in

MK2000_C#KSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

to serve as a reference implementation to speed custom application development.

NOTE

When demonstrating the MK2200 to customers, use the Web Kiosk Software Suite, discussed on

page 6-1

, which demonstrates more functionality than the C# KSS.

C# Kiosk Software Suite Features

The C# Kiosk Software Suite supports the following features.

The customer facing screens demonstrate the following functionality:

Price verification

Loyalty program

Guided selling tool

Alternate language text

Advertising (attract loop).

Additional functions of the Store Operations application are:

Removal of the Internet Explorer toolbar

Removal of the CE Start bar

Scan engine control

Enabling / disabling symbologies

Automatic device setup using an mkconfig.reg file.

7 - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Customer Facing

Advertising

Loyalty

Program

Guided

Selling Tool

CD

Playback

Price

Verification

Alternate

Language

Support

Employee Facing

Video

Training

Messaging

System

Employee

Bulletin

Voicemail

Replying

Installing the C# Kiosk Software Suite

To install and run the C# KSS, first install the .NET Compact Framework and the Symbol Mobility Developer Kit v1.1 (SMDK) for .NET in the target device.

Loading .NET Compact Framework onto an MK Device

The SMDK includes Microsoft .NET Compact Framework installation files.

The mass deployment files for the MK Series are located in the

\Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for

.NET\vX.X\Windows CE\MassDeployment\MKSeries

folder. These files (.cab, .cpy, and .reg) are used to copy the

.NET Compact Framework and SMDK CAB files from the

\Application

partition into the

\Windows

directory and install upon a cold boot. The CAB files are installed using Startup.exe, which initiates wceload.exe (standard

CAB installation method) or wceldcmd.exe (UI-less install) with the command line that contains the name of the

CAB file.

NOTE

The .NET CF CAB files are not provided in the Mass Deployment directory. Manually copy them from the Visual Studio .NET 2003 directory to the \Application folder on the Symbol device.

For Windows CE .NET devices the .NET CF CAB files (netcf.all.wce4.armv4.cab) are located in the

\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003\ CompactFrameworkSDK\v1.0.5000\Windows

CE\wce400\armv4 folder.

Downloading SMDK Installation Files

The SMDK is available in the Symbol Developer Zone, http://devzone.symbol.com/ . Register at this site to access Symbol Developer resources.

Installing SMDK onto a Desktop PC

To install the SMDK to a host computer, run the setup program. This copies all SMDK samples, Visual Studio

.NET Smart Application Projects, and Mass Deployment content to subfolders in the selected SMDK installation folder. For additional information, refer to the Read Me file or the SMDK help.

C# Kiosk Software Suite 7 - 3

Installing .NET Compact Framework onto the MK2200

Create a temporary folder with Symbol-specific CAB files and generic .NET framework CAB files described in

Loading .NET Compact Framework onto an MK Device on page 7-2

. Include the .CPY files as well as the

.REG together with the wceldcmd.exe available in the MK Series mass deployment directory. Once all files are copied to the temporary folder, copy the content to the root of the application partition of the target device and reboot. The device should be ready with the .NET CF and SMDK APIs.

For details on copy file (.CPY), see

page 8-7 .

Install the C# KSS onto the MK2200

Download the MK2000C#KSS_X.XX.zip deployment files from the Symbol Developer Zone

( http://devzone.symbol.com

) and extract the content to the application partition of the target MK device. Reboot the device to load the application full-screen.

C# Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

The C# Kiosk Software Suite uses the bar codes in

Appendix E, C# Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

to

demonstrate MK2200 capabilities.

Automated Launching of the C# KSS

You can configure the MK2200 to automatically load the .NET Compact Framework and launch the C# KSS upon power-up. See the following set of registry entries.

For a detailed list of other C# source code, see

page 7-12

.

Auto-loading the .NET Compact Framework at Boot-up Sequence

Boot-up redeploys the .NET CF files to the Windows folder from the application partition using registry (*.REG) files and copy (*.CPY) files stored in the

Application

folder. For additional information on RegMerge and

CopyFiles, see page 8-6

and

page 8-7 .

Framework deployment is done before running any .NET executable to avoid dependencies.

The following set of registry entries show how the framework deployment is given priority over loading C# KSS

(C# Kiosk Software Suite.exe) at a boot-up.

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Symbol\Startup\Programs\Prog11]

"Name"="\windows\wceldcmd.exe"

"Command"="\Windows\netcf.all.wce4.armv4.cab"

"Continue"=dword:0

"ColdBootOnly"=dword:1

7 - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Symbol\Startup\Programs\Prog12]

"Name"="\windows\wceldcmd.exe"

"Command"="\Windows\symbol.all.arm.cab"

"Continue"=dword:0

"ColdBootOnly"=dword:1

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Symbol\Startup\Programs\Prog13]

"Name"="\windows\wceldcmd.exe"

"Command"="\Windows\symbol.mkseries.all.arm.cab"

"Continue"=dword:0

"ColdBootOnly"=dword:1

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Symbol\StartUp\Programs\Prog14]

"Name"="\\Application\\MK2000 C# Kiosk Software Suite

\\MK2000 C# Kiosk Software Suite.exe"

"Continue"=dword:1

NOTE

Prog11- Prog17 indicates the sequence of the startup applications. Prog13, Prog14, Prog15 is used for installing SMDK CAB files as well as the .NET CF CAB files using wceldcmd.exe. For additional programming information, refer to the MK2000_C#KSS_Install+SourceCode.doc.

Auto Launching the C# KSS at Power Up

C# Kiosk Software Suite.exe is loaded after the .NET framework. This user application occupies the sixth slot of the start sequence.

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Symbol\StartUp\Programs\Prog14]

"Name"="\\Application\\MK2000 C# Kiosk Software Suite

\\MK2000 C# Kiosk Software Suite.exe"

"Continue"=dword:1

C# Kiosk Software Suite Structure

The C# Kiosk Software Suite

Customer Application

screens demonstrate customer-facing functionality, and the

Store Operations

screens demonstrate employee-facing functionality.

These screens use the four programmable buttons and/or virtual touch screen buttons (displayed over the four function buttons).

The

Customer Application

screens demonstrate the customer support features:

Main Menu Bar on page 7-5

Scanning Bar Codes on page 7-5

Attract Mode on page 7-6

Price Verification on page 7-7

C# Kiosk Software Suite 7 - 5

Loyalty Program on page 7-7

Guided Selling Tool (Fitting Guide) on page 7-8

.

The

Store Operations Screen on page 7-9

demonstrates sample store operations that the MK2200 supports, including:

In-Store Messaging on page 7-9

-

Voicemail Options Screen on page 6-19

-

Voicemail Messages Screen on page 7-10

-

Voicemail Recording Screen on page 7-11

-

Text Messaging Screen on page 7-11

-

Voicemail Messages Screen on page 7-10

.

Customer Application Screens

Main Menu Bar

In Attract Mode (Idle Mode) the MK2200 displays the

Main Menu

bar titles above the programmable buttons.

Figure 7-1

Main Menu Bar

Pressing one of the associated buttons on the main menu bar displays the following C# KSS screens:

Fitting Guide

- displays the

Fitting Guide

screen

Loyalty Program

- displays the

Loyalty Program

screen.

Scanning Bar Codes

Scan a bar code (on an item SKU, employee badge, or loyalty card) from any point within an application where the scanner is active. For example, after a store employee scans an item's SKU for price lookup, the employee can scan an employee badge on the

Price Verification

screen to directly access the store operations menu.

For sample source code that demonstrates how to control the scan engine from a C# application, refer to the

MK2000_C#KSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file, which is part of the C# Kiosk Software Suite (see

page 7-12)

.

7 - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Attract Mode

Attract Mode Ads

C# Kiosk Software Suite enters Attract Mode after a period of inactivity, and displays a series of advertisements. The

Main Menu

bar is visible during the slide show. The C# Kiosk Software Suite Attract Mode rotates five sample promotional messages in the main dialog. The attract loop images are stored in the

\Application\C# Kiosk Software Suite\SlideShow_Images

folder.

Figure 7-2

Slide Show Screens

Inserting Different Attract Mode Ads

There are five attract images loaded in the C# KSS for demo purpose. You can overwrite these images, which are stored in

\Application\C# Kiosk Software Suite\SlideShow_Images

, with customized GIF files that duplicate the names of the existing images. Attract Mode loads these new images to the attract loop when the application starts.

Ad Size / Shape Requirements

Attract images occupy the entire 640x480 screen. Images are rendered from point (0,0). Therefore ensure all attract images are exactly 640 pixels wide and 480 pixels high. Smaller images occupy a limited screen area.

C# Kiosk Software Suite 7 - 7

Price Verification

The C# Kiosk Software Suite has three

Price Verification

screen formats:

Price Verification

screen (Loyalty Program enabled) - requires the Loyalty Program bar code to access special Loyalty Program product information.

Price Verification

screen (non-Loyalty Program) - displays standard non-Loyalty Program product information.

Price Verification

screen (Audio Enabled).

Loyalty Program

Select

Loyalty Program

on Attract Mode advertisements to open the

Loyalty Program

screen.

Figure 7-3

Loyalty Program Enabled, Price Verification Screen

Scan the bar code

Loyalty Card on page E-3

to move to the

Loyalty Program

screen.

Figure 7-4

Loyalty Program Screen

7 - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Guided Selling Tool (Fitting Guide)

Scan the bar code

Pants UPC-A on page E-1

.

Figure 7-5

Non-Loyalty Program, Price Verification Screen

The Pants UPC-A screen flow demonstrates the guided-selling capability of the C# KSS.

Navigate through the screen flow by pressing the buttons on the screen.

Home -

returns the C# KSS to Attract Mode.

Español (alternate language) - changes screen text to the alternate language (Spanish is the default), including all screen titles, buttons titles, and price verification field titles. This language remains in effect until you exit the screen or select another button.

Fitting Guide

- displays the

Fitting Guide

screen that displays different styles for a particular item.

Accessories

- displays the

Accessories

screen.

CD Listening Station

The

Audio Enabled Price Verification

screen provides an audio listening station for the

Price Verification

screen.

A default WAV file is played when the page is loaded. If no interaction is detected, the application returns to

Attract Mode after the timeout period. Options include:

Two volume control buttons (louder/quieter)

Pause (two bar) button

Home

, returns to

Attract Mode on page 7-6

.

Scan the bar code

CD on page E-2

.

Figure 7-6

Audio Enabled Price Verification Screen

C# Kiosk Software Suite 7 - 9

Store Operations Screen

Scan the

Employee Badge on page E-3

(5 digit code 128) to enter

Store Operations

mode.

The

Store Operations

menu bar offers the following buttons:

Messages

(see

In-Store Messaging on page 7-9

)

Home - returns to Attract Mode.

Figure 7-7

Store Operations Screen

In-Store Messaging

Select

Messages

to open the in-store messages screen. The first (most recent) item is highlighted. The

In-Store Messaging menu bar indicates current button functions.

Button options are:

Up

- scrolls up the message list.

Down

- scrolls down the message list.

Open - opens the selected message on the list:

-

Select a

Voicemail

message to view the

Voicemail Messages Screen on page 7-10

.

-

Select a text message (in this demo “

Employee Bulletin

”) to view the

Text Messaging Screen on page

7-11

.

-

Select a video message (in this demo “

Training Video

”) to view the

Video Message Screen on page

7-12

.

7 - 10 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Home

- returns to the

Store Operations Screen on page 7-9

.

Figure 7-8

In-Store Messaging Screen

Voicemail Messages Screen

Select a voicemail item from the

In-Store Messaging

screen to view a

Voicemail Messages

screen, used to listen or respond to a voice message.

Right pointer

- plays the message.

Reply

- displays the

Voicemail Recording Screen on page 7-11

.

Delete - deletes the message. (This button has no functionality. It is used as an example screen layout only.)

Home - returns to the previous messaging screen.

Figure 7-9

Voicemail Screen

Select the

Right pointer

button to play the voice mail.

Figure 7-10

Voicemail Playback Screen

C# Kiosk Software Suite 7 - 11

First speaker

- decreases volume.

Second speaker

- increases volume.

Double bar

- pauses the recorded message.

Home

- returns to the

Voicemail Screen on page 7-10

.

Voicemail Recording Screen

Select

Reply

from the

Voicemail

screen to record a voice mail reply using the MK2200 built-in microphone (see

Figure 1-1 on page 1-3

), and play the message back.

Press to Record

- hold down and speak into the microphone to record a reply message.

Right pointer

- plays the recorded message file.

Send - sends the message. (This button has no functionality. It is used as an example screen layout only.)

Back - returns to the

Voicemail Messages Screen on page 7-10

.

Figure 7-11

Voicemail Response Screen

Text Messaging Screen

Select a text-based message item from the main messages screen to use the

Text Messaging

screen to view a text-based message.

Delete

- deletes the message and returns to the

In-Store Messaging on page 7-9

.

Back - returns to the

In-Store Messaging on page 7-9

.

Figure 7-12

Text Messaging Screen

7 - 12 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Video Message Screen

Select a video training message from the main message screen to view a full screen video.

Figure 7-13

Video Message Screen

Use the controls in the Windows Media Player for viewing the video message.

NOTE

A CFCOM evaluation license key is provided by Odyssey Software. Contact Odyssey

Software for CFCOM licensing information at www.odysseysoftware.com, or 585-214-2409, extension 201.

C# KSS Source Code Index

Refer to the

MK2000_C#KSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file for sample source code for the following functionality.

Scan Engine Control

Initializing the scan engine

Start read

Stop read

Reader notification and event delegation

Close scan engine

Symbol .NET scanner assemblies

Scanner related members

Appending a carriage return to scanner data.

Screen Layout

Hiding Windows CE Taskbar and Windows CE Start menu

Touch screen click sound

Click sound inside virtual buttons (no sound outside buttons)

Deactivate sound outside virtual buttons

-

Buttons

-

Screen timeouts.

Button Control

Physical button control

External button events

Virtual buttons

-

Click sound inside virtual buttons

-

Deactivate sound outside virtual buttons.

Version Tracking

Remote tracking of version number

Application revision history - local (version.txt).

Video Playback

Odyssey software component

Initializing video control

License information and ProgID

Video files

Automatic invoke.

Automating Launch of the C# KSS

Printing on a Zebra QL320 Printer

Text

Bar codes

Bitmaps.

C# Kiosk Software Suite 7 - 13

7 - 14 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Chapter 8

Chapter 8

System Features

Overview

This chapter discusses the following operating system features:

Network Security on page 8-2

SNMP-Based Remote Monitoring on page 8-3

RegMerge and CopyFiles on page 8-6

Accessing the Windows® CE Desktop on page 8-7

Password Protection (Gate Keeper) on page 8-7

Remapping Buttons on page 8-8

Network Time Update: SNTP Client on page 8-10

Memory Management on page 8-10

FTP Server on page 8-11

Inactivity Application (Screen Saver) on page 8-12

Browser Applications - Hiding Toolbars on page 8-13

Browser Applications - Handling Network Disconnects on page 8-14

Loading Additional Fonts on the MK2200 on page 8-15

Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard) on page 8-17

Microsoft WordPad on page 8-18

Windows Media Player on page 8-19

Internet Explorer on page 8-19

Printer Object Test on page 8-21

MSR Object Test on page 8-22

Scanner Object Test on page 8-23

Audio Object Test on page 8-24

MicroKiosk Object Test on page 8-25

.

Also see

Electronic Serial Number on page 4-11

.

System Features

8 - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Security Overview

The following items and features help secure the device from external intrusion:

ActiveSync - deactivation when an application is running: pages 3-10

and

5-1

.

FTP Server - partial or complete deactivation: pages 3-23

and

8-11 .

Web Server deactivation: page

3-19 .

Password protecting access to CE Desktop: pages 8-7

,

3-15

and

6-2

.

RS-232 Port - page

2-12 .

Browser error page redirection: page

8-14 .

RF Security: pages B-2 ,

B-3, B-7

and B-12 .

Open TCP ports: page

8-2

.

Network Security

The MK220 has the following open TCP ports:

Port 23: FTP server

Port 80: Default HTTPD listen port

Port 443: Default SSL listen port.

By default the FTP server runs on the MK2200 allowing anonymous login, which makes the entire folder structure accessible to any user.

Using the System Menu or RDM, disable the feature that allows anonymous login to secure the system. Use the Windows Domain control to authenticate the allowed users to login to the FTP server running on the device. Then, using the RDM, enter user information (User Name and Password) required to access the device FTP server.

The web server in the MK2200 is enabled by default. Use the System Menu or RDM to disable and enable the web server.

System Features 8 - 3

SNMP-Based Remote Monitoring

The MK2200 supports Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Version 2c. The MK2200 includes an

SNMP agent. The MK2200 supports two Host Resource Management Information Bases (HR MIBs):

The MK2200 extends Microsoft implementation of the MIB-II defined Host Resource MIB to report software versions, file system values, partition table values, and a few miscellaneous items.

A custom HR MIB performs actions such as rebooting the MK2200. The previous MIBs support Microsoft default implementation.

This guide does not provide details of supported MIB-II and Host Resource MIB (HRMIB) functionality, except for specific changes to the HR MIB made for MicroKiosk products.

NOTE

Download a detailed specification of the MK2200 MicroKiosk SNMP agent/MIB at http://devzone.symbol.com.

The software versions are published using tables within the hrSWInstalledTable table, which is part of the Host

Resource MIB. hrStorageTable presents the filesystem information. See

List of Reported Software Component

Versions on page 8-3

for more information on what is reported using the Host Resource MIB.

The MicroKiosk line of products use the SysOID (System Object Identifier) listed in

Table 8-1

. This OID is the prefix for all OIDs in the MicroKiosk Custom MIB.

Table 8-1

SysOID

Product

MK2200

SysOID

.1.3.6.1.4.1.388.10.3

These SysOIDs come from the tree officially assigned to Symbol Technologies (.1.3.6.1.4.1.388) and are registered with the body within Symbol that manages our SNMP OIDs.

List of Reported Software Component Versions

The Host Resource MIB reports the items in

Table 8-2

, which indicates where to find this information in the

Host Resource MIB. Use the RDM to view this information. See

Monitoring MK2200s on a Network on page

4-16

.

Table 8-2

Reported Software Component Versions

Item Host Resource MIB Location

Symbol OS

Windows CE OS

Monitor/IPL

Scanner C API hrInstalledSoftware hrInstalledSoftware hrInstalledSoftware hrInstalledSoftware

Scanner Driver MDD

Scanner Driver PDD

Scanner Decoder Firmware hrInstalledSoftware hrInstalledSoftware hrInstalledSoftware

8 - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table 8-2

Reported Software Component Versions (Continued)

Scanner Hardware

Item Host Resource MIB Location

hrInstalledSoftware

Radio Driver

Radio Firmware hrInstalledSoftware hrInstalledSoftware

Radio Hardware

N User Application names/versions

Processor Name/Type

RAM Size hrInstalledSoftware hrInstalledSoftware hrDeviceTable hrDeviceTable

Flash Size

Other devices

Partitions - name/size

(Platform, Application, Data, Object Store)

Filesystem Information hrDeviceTable hrDeviceTable hrPartitionTable hrStorageTable

User Application Version Reporting

SNMP reports user application names and version information as follows:

Upon boot up, the MK2200 reads a .reg file (e.g., application_name.reg) created and loaded into the

Application partition (folder), and loads its contents into the system registry.

Values under the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\AppVersions represent software components. Each value/data pair specifies the name of the component and its version, respectively. These values must be string values.

The Symbol RDM and a number of off-the-shelf SNMP-based network management packages can read

application version information (see Software Version Information under

Monitoring MK2200s on a Network on page 4-16

).

For a sample .reg file see the Web Kiosk Software Suite Web_KioskSoftwareSuite.reg file which contains the following text on two lines:

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\AppVersions]

"Web_KioskSoftwareSuite"="x.x"

When an MK2200 that contains the Web_KioskSoftwareSuite.reg file in its Application folder (file is present at bootup) is queried by the RDM for application version information, it returns the application name and version:

web_kiosksoftwaresuite

and

x.x

.

NOTE

For tracking purpose, it is recommended that the name of the registry setting is the same as the registry file name.

System Features 8 - 5

Actions - Custom MIB

When running OS version 1.1.1 and platform MK20XXPlat_2.00.17.hex or later, the MicroKiosk Custom HR

MIB supports the actions and commands in

Table 8-3

.

Table 8-3

Custom MIB Actions/Commands

Action/Value

Cold Boot

Var Name

Cold boots the MK2200.

OID Access Data Type

Warm Boot

Launch AirBeam

stiWarmBoot SysOID.10.2

WO

Launches AirBeam with no command-line parameters, causing it to perform the function stored in its registry settings. There is no mechanism to provide command-line arguments to AirBeam using SNMP.

stiLaunchAirBeam SysOID.10.3

WO

GUID

stiColdBoot

Warm boots the MK2200.

SysOID.10.1

WO

Product Group

Returns the globally unique system identifier (GUID/UUID). Use this for reliable product tracking as this number does not change if the operating system or other portion of system software changes.

stiSystemGUID SysOID.10.4

RO String (DisplayString)

Alpha prefix for product (e.g., MK, MC, PDT, PPT, VRC). Allows filtering a class of devices in the Remote Terminal Manager.

stiProductGroup SysOID.10.7

RO String (DisplayString)

Product

Generation

Domain

Configuration

Group 1

Numeric portion of product (e.g., 2200, 1100, 9000, 8100, 2800, 6900).

Allows filtering a specific device in the Remote Terminal Manager.

stiProduct SysOID.10.8

RO String (DisplayString)

Generation of device. For products with multiple hardware implementations

(e.g., PDT 8100, PPT 2800). Allows filtering specific generations in the

Remote Terminal Manager and refines product model reporting.

stiGeneration SysOID.10.9

RO String (DisplayString)

A unique string used by the RDM to identify the product.

stiDomain SysOID.10.10

RO String (DisplayString)

A user-defined string that can be filtered in the Remote Terminal Manager

(e.g., hardware, housewares, East Coast).

stiConfGroup1 SysOID.10.11

RO String (DisplayString)

8 - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table 8-3

Custom MIB Actions/Commands (Continued)

Action/Value

Configuration

Group 2

Var Name OID Access Data Type

A user-defined string that can be filtered in the Remote Terminal Manager

(e.g., hardware, housewares, East Coast).

MIB Version

stiConfGroup2 SysOID.10.12

The version of the terminal MIB.

RO String stiCustomMibVersion SysOID.10.13

RO String (DisplayString)

RegMerge and CopyFiles

RegMerge and CopyFiles are two device drivers included in the Windows CE OS to assist developers in configuring the MK2200 following a cold boot.

RegMerge.dll

RegMerge.dll is a built-in driver that allows making registry edits to the Windows CE Registry. Regmerge.dll runs very early in the boot process and looks for registry files (.reg files) in certain Flash File System folders during a cold boot. It then merges the registry changes into the system registry located in RAM.

Since the registry is re-created on every cold boot from the default ROM image, the RegMerge driver is necessary to make registry modifications persist between cold boots.

RegMerge looks in the root of two specific folders for .reg files in the following order:

1.

\Platform

2.

\Application

Regmerge continues to look for .reg files in these folders until all folders are checked. This allows folders later in the list to override folders earlier in the list. This way, it is possible to override Registry changes made by the

Platform partition folders. Take care when using Regmerge to make Registry changes. The Device

Configuration Package (DCP) for the MK2200 contains real examples of .reg files.

NOTE

RegMerge only merges the .reg files during a cold boot. A warm boot skips the merge process.

Modifying registry values for drivers loaded before RegMerge is not recommended. However, these values may require modification during software development. Since these early loading drivers read these keys before RegMerge can change them, you must warm boot the MK2200. The warm boot does not re-initialize the registry and the early loading driver reads the new registry values. Note that loading a registry key that corresponds to a built-in driver sets a flag in the regmerge.dll to execute an automatic warm boot.

Do not use RegMerge to merge the same registry value to two files in the same folder, as the results are not predictable.

System Features 8 - 7

CopyFiles

Windows CE expects certain files to be in the Windows folder, residing in volatile storage. Windows CE maintains the System Registry in volatile storage. CopyFiles copies files from one folder to another on a cold boot. Files can be copied from a non-volatile partition (Application or Platform) to the Windows or other volatile partition during a cold boot. During a cold boot CopyFiles looks for files with a .CPY extension in the root of the

Platform, then Application FFS partition. These files are text files containing the source and destination for the desired files to be copied separated by ">". Following is the content of a sample .cpy file that copies

ScanSamp2.exe from the

Applications\Samples

folder to the

\Windows

folder.

Example:

Content of ScanSamp2.cpy

\Application\ Samples\ScanSamp2.exe > \Windows\ScanSamp2.exe

Files are copied to the Windows folder from the flash file system using copy files (*.cpy) in the following order:

\Platform

\Application

Accessing the Windows

®

CE Desktop

If an MK2200 is configured to launch an application on power-up, you can bypass the application at boot-up to access to the Windows

®

CE desktop. See

Accessing the Windows® CE Desktop on page 6-2

.

Password Protection (Gate Keeper)

The Gate Keeper application provides password protection preventing unauthorized access to the Windows

®

CE desktop.

At bootup

: After Windows

®

CE boots (just after the blue

Performing System Initialization (Phase 1)

screen displays), but before an application launches, the Gate Keeper application checks (for two seconds) to see if the user selected the appropriate combination of buttons (currently

A

and

D

) to request password

entry. See

Accessing the Windows® CE Desktop on page 6-2

for the procedure.

While an application is running

: Gate Keeper also password protects access to button functionality such as viewing the System menu while an application is running. See

Setting Defaults Using the

System Menu on page 3-5

and

Table 8-5 on page 8-8

for a list of button functionality.

The buttons are mapped to produce the characters 1, 2, 3, 4, Enter, and Escape, as listed in

Table 8-4

. On the password screen, enter the desired character sequence and press

Enter

to submit the password and gain access to the Windows

®

desktop. If the password is incorrect, the MK2200 runs the specified user applications.

NOTE

When specifying the protected mode password in the RDM or System Menu, enter the password in terms of the characters mapped by Gate Keeper (1-4), not the alphabetic labels (A-D) used in this document.

The default password is 4,4,2,1,3.

8 - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

C

D

A

B

Use the RDM Protected Mode feature (System Configuration/Protected Mode) to set up password protection.

See

Protected Mode on page 3-15

.

Table 8-4

Button Mappings for Protected Mode

Button Combo

A and D

Character / Action

Request Protected Mode

Note

Only for 2 seconds after boot

A and B

C and D

‘1’

‘2’

‘3’

‘4’

‘Enter’ (Return)

‘Escape’ (Cancel)

During password entry

During password entry

During password entry

During password entry

During password entry

During password entry

Remapping Buttons

AC

AD

BC

ABC

ABD

ACD

BCD

B

C

D

AB

Use the four buttons on the front of the MK2200 individually or in combinations. All 15 combinations can remap to a virtual keycode that represents a given character or key sequence, as defined in

Table 8-5

. Holding any

combination that includes buttons

B

and

C

for more than 15 seconds causes a cold boot. Use the Control

Panel - Button Definitions, the System Menu, or RDM to remap the buttons (see

Table 8-6 on page 8-9

).

Table 8-5

Default Button Mapping

Button Combo

A

Mapping Hex Code

Up 0x26

Down 0x28

Left 0x25

Right 0x27

Enter/Return 0x0D

Shift-Tab

Alt 0x12

Show/Hide Virtual Keyboard

System Menu

Alt-Down

Touchscreen Calibration

0xC2

0xc7

0xC5

0xC3

0xC4

Backspace 0x08

System Features 8 - 9

Table 8-5

Default Button Mapping (Continued)

BD

Button Combo

Tab

Mapping

CD

ABCD

Cancel/Escape

Hex Code

0x09

0x1B

Signal Strength (Mobile Companion Information tab) 0xC6

NOTE

To disable a button combination, set its mapping to 0.

To perform a cold boot press and hold buttons B and C until the display goes blank (typically 15 seconds) then release the buttons.

Button Remapping - Keycode Values

Use the keycode values in

Table 8-6

to remap buttons.

Table 8-6

Keycode Values

TAB

ALT

END

UP

Function

BACK

CLEAR

RETURN

SHIFT

CONTROL

CAPITAL

ESCAPE

SPACE

PRIOR

NEXT

HOME

LEFT

RIGHT

Value

0x08

0x09

0x0C

0x0D

0x10

0x11

0x12

0x14

0x1B

0x20

0x21

0x22

0x23

0x24

0x25

0x26

0x27

BACKQUOTE

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

F12

Button Values

Function

COMMA

HYPHEN

PERIOD

SLASH

0x76

0x77

0x78

0x79

0x72

0x73

0x74

0x75

0x7A

0x7B

Value

0xBC

0xBD

0xBE

0xBF

0xC0

0x70

0x71

8 - 10 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table 8-6

Keycode Values (Continued)

Function Value

Button Values

Function

DOWN

MULTIPLY

0x28

0x6A

0 thru 9 are the same as ASCII '0' thru '9'

A thru Z are the same as ASCII 'A' thru 'Z'

Value

0x30 – 0x39

0x41 - 0x5A

ADD

SEPARATOR

SUBTRACT

DECIMAL

DIVIDE

SEMICOLON

0x6B

0x6C

0x6D

0x6E

0x6F

0xBA

SHIFT-TAB

ALT-DOWN

CALIBRATION

SYSTEM MENU

Mobile Companion Signal Strength /

Aegis Client Configuration Dialog

TOGGLE SOFTWARE INPUT PANEL

(SIP)

0xC2

0xC3

0xC4

0xC5

0xC6

0xC7

EQUAL 0xBB

Network Time Update: SNTP Client

The MK2200 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) client can automatically set and update the MK2200 time and date through the network. Use this feature to set the system time and date after reboots or power outages.

This feature also ensures consistent time and date stamping across a fleet of MK2200s. The SNTP Client program queries the specified SNTP server over the network to set the time and date.

The SNTP client shipped with MK2200 WinCE 4.20 is the Microsoft default SNTP Client program. (This is a change from the WinCE 4.1 operating system, which had a custom SNTP client).

MK2200 allows changing four parameters of the SNTP Client. See

Network Time Update on page 3-13

.

Memory Management

Flash: Nonvolatile (Persistent) Memory

The MK2200 has 64 MB of available nonvolatile flash memory. 5 MB is committed for platform partition use to install external driver packs such as RF drivers, 27 MB is available for developer’s applications within the application partition (folder). The data partition (folder) has no available memory. The data stored in flash memory persists through cold boot cycles.

To increase usable persistent (flash) memory, use TCM to adjust the allocation of memory between the application and data partitions.

Add a PC card to the MK2200 to increase the non-volatile memory available for file storage.

System Features 8 - 11

RAM: Volatile (Non-Persistent) Memory

The MK2200 has 32 MB of DRAM volatile memory. Developers can automate control of the device’s RAM

(volatile) memory allocation (storage vs. memory used to run programs) to persist memory allocation settings through cold boot cycles.

Use the Symbol RDM or the System Menu to permanently configure RAM memory allocations (memory used to run programs).

(

System Configuration > Memory Allocation > SystemStorePercent

).

NOTE

The RDM/System Menu can only configure unused RAM.

FTP Server

The MK2200 supports the minimum implementation of the FTP server defined in RFC 959, which includes configuration values, transfer parameters, and supports only ASCII and image data types.

NOTE

You cannot use FTP to update partitions.

CAUTION

Never enable the server in anonymous mode if the MK2200 is accessible from the internet.

The FTP server is enabled by default. Use the RDM utility FTP Server feature (

Update/FTP Server

) to set up the

FTP server. See

page 3-23 .

FTP Server Registry Parameters

Allow Anonymous

- This parameter determines whether to provide anonymous access to users for copying data from MK2200. When enabled, users do not need an account on the local machine.

Allow Anonymous Upload

- Use this parameter to enable/disable anonymous users to copy data to the

MK2200.

FTP Enable Part I

- This parameter determines whether the FTP server is loaded/accessible when the

MicroKiosk is powered on. Disabling this does not affect the RDM’s ability to load or retrieve mkconfig.reg files using the

Push Configuration File

and

Retrieve Remote Configuration File

options respectively.

FTP Enable Part II

- Enabling this parameter allows the RDM to load/retrieve a mkconfig.reg file even if the MicroKiosk FTP server is disabled (FTP Enable Part I = disabled). If both FTP Enable Part I and FTP

Enable Part II parameters are disabled, you cannot load the mkconfig.reg file remotely using the RDM or

FTP. However, you can load the mkconfig.reg file locally using an ActiveSync connection or a PC card.

Root Directory

- Use this parameter to set the root directory, which could be accessed remotely. If you do not specify the root directory, the default

\Temp

is set.

Use Authentication

- Use this parameter to enable/disable authorization to connect to the server. If enabled, a valid user account on the local machine is required and the correct ID and password for the account must be specified to the server.

8 - 12 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

User Authentication Domain

- Valid Windows domain to look for users that are allowed to access FTP service. The FTP server authenticates user password from this Domain Controller.

User List

- Use this parameter when the Use Authentication parameter is enabled to set the list of users that are able to access the FTP server.

Inactivity Application (Screen Saver)

The Inactivity Application Manager (IAM) is the screen saver engine for the MK2200. It launches and terminates the screen saver at appropriate times but does not provide the screen saver images.

Use one of the provided applications, or create an application. Use the RDM utility Inactivity Manager feature to configure the IAM (

System Configuration > Inactivity Manager

). See

Inactivity Manager on page 3-26

.

The screen saver exits if any of the following events occur:

• bar code scan pen tap button press

MSR swipe.

Note that using a bar code scan or an MSR swipe to exit the screen saver also passes this data to the application using an ActiveX object, while using a pen tap or button press to wake the device does not pass any additional information to other applications.

SimpleSaver

The SimpleSaver program is the default IAM application, and clears the screen to white and repeatedly displays the following message at different locations on the screen:

Perform some action to wake me up!

This provides a simple example of how to implement a custom application, and is not intended as a final presentation tool. The SMDKs provide source code.

SlideShow

The

SlideShow

screen saver program endlessly displays a group of graphics files (slides) one at a time. The program supports the following file extensions:

JPG

GIF

BMP

2BP.

System Features 8 - 13

The program uses the following registry entries under the

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Symbol\SlideShow] key:

Directory

- A string value specifying the directory containing the graphic files. Only one directory is supported.

Delay

- A DWORD value indicating the number of seconds to display each graphic. If not specified, the default is 5 seconds. The minimum duration is 2 seconds.

Background

- A DWORD value specifying the background color to use around graphics that are smaller than the screen size. If not specified, the default background is black.

Set these values using the RDM. The program does not accept command line parameters.

Once the program has read the registry entries, it reads a file named

SlideShow.txt

from the graphics directory.

This file should contain one file name per line. These file names should not include a path and must exist within the graphics directory. The files appear in the order specified.

If the

SlideShow.txt

file is not present, the program scans the graphics directory for all files with the appropriate file name extensions and displays these files in a sequence determined by the file system.

If a slide is smaller than the screen size, it is centered on the screen and the background color appears around the slide. If a slide is larger than the screen size, it is scaled to fit on the screen. This can result in an undesirable effect if the slide is not proportional to the screen size. For best results, use slides that are the same size as the screen. Source code is provided in the SMDKs.

Browser Applications - Hiding Toolbars

The MK2200 ships running the standard browser (iesample.exe), which leaves the Windows

®

CE start bar and the Internet Explorer toolbar accessible. To run a browser application with no toolbars (Windows CE

®

start bar and Internet Explorer toobar), use KioskIE.exe. To start the browser application using KioskIE.exe without toolbars, use the RDM.

First, within the RDM, configure the “first application launched” for KioskIE.exe, using the path: system configuration/user app(s)/First application launched/application path

Enter \windows\KioskIE.exe in the

application path

field.

Second, set the

start page

for the browser. The path to the

start page

is: applications/Internet Explorer/

[start page]

Then enter the start page URL.

NOTE

If using wireless connectivity and the start page is stored within the network, set a delay of about 10 seconds before KioskIE.exe launches to allow time for the MK2200 to establish the

wireless connection. See

Configuring User Application(s) on page 3-22

.

For sample source code that demonstrates hiding browser toolbars and the Windows

®

CE start bar from a browser application, refer to the

MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file, which is part of the Web Kiosk

Software Suite (see

page 6-2)

.

8 - 14 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Browser Applications - Handling Network Disconnects

The KioskIE.exe browser can redirect to a custom Error Recovery Page if it detects an Internet Explorer error page (like a error 404). Since the errors are likely to occur during network outages, Symbol recommends using locally stored files to drive the custom error recovery page. Once directed to a local URL, a customer friendly message appears while script code retries to connect.

NOTE

The Internet Explorer error recovery mechanism can only handle errors occurring when loading the main frame of the loading web page.

Specify the on-board error recovery page to appear in

Applications > Kiosk IE > ErrorRecoveryPage

. See

ErrorRecoveryPage on page 3-7

.

The device includes a sample page in

\Windows\RetryPage.html

.

Configuring Error Page Redirection

KioskIE includes an Error Page Redirection feature that defines specific HTML code as errors and allows the

KioskIE to navigate to an on-board error recovery page. For this purpose the .reg file

KioskIE_ErrorPageList.reg is added to either the Platform or Application folder. The .reg file includes the following entries:

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Symbol\IEBrowser]

"PageErrorList"=hex(7):\ 54,68,65,20,70,61,67,65,20,63,61,6e,6e,6f,74,20,62,65,20,66,6f,75,6e,64,00,\

43,61,6e,6e,6f,74,20,66,69,6e,64,20,73,65,72,76,65,72,00,\

46,6f,72,63,65,20,45,72,72,6f,72,00,00,00,00

These entries correspond to the following common errors reported by most Web servers:

Line 1: The page cannot be found.

Line 2: Cannot find server.

Line 3: Force error.

To add a new error page, append the title of the error page to the registry entry above. The entry is stated in the hex value of the corresponding ASCII characters in the title of the error page.

For example, to add an error page titled "AAA BBBB CCCCC" to the error pages shown above, append the registry entry for the new error page as ‘line 4’, shown below.

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Symbol\IEBrowser]

"PageErrorList"=hex(7):\

54,68,65,20,70,61,67,65,20,63,61,6e,6e,6f,74,20,62,65,20,66,6f,75,6e,64,00,\

43,61,6e,6e,6f,74,20,66,69,6e,64,20,73,65,72,76,65,72,00,\

46,6f,72,63,65,20,45,72,72,6f,72,00,\

41,41,41,20,42,42,42,42,20,43,43,43,43,43,00,00,00,00

System Features 8 - 15

Loading Additional Fonts on the MK2200

You can program the MK2200 to support additional fonts such as Unicode and double-byte character font.

The MK2200 supports the following system fonts as shipped from the factory. The font files corresponding to these formats are located in the

\windows

folder with .ttf extension.

Arial

Comic Sans MS

Courier New

Georgia

Symbol

Tahoma

Times New Roman

Verdana

Wingding.

The default system font path for these fonts is \windows.

Use one of the following options to load fonts not supplied with the MK2200:

Change the system font path where the system looks for fonts. For example, to change default system font path from

\windows

to

\application\fonts

add the following registry to the system along with new fonts in

\application\fonts:

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\FontPath]

"FontPath"="\application\fonts"

Adding this registry changes the entire system fonts directory, so fonts supplied with the OS are no longer available. To use both the provided system fonts and new fonts, copy the system default fonts to the new font directory.

Copy new/alternate fonts to the default

\windows

directory.

Copy alternate fonts to the

\windows\fonts

directory.

Copying new fonts to the \windows or \windows\fonts preserves existing fonts. However the new fonts consume system RAM as they are part of the ObjectStore.

Using the third option, i.e., copying fonts to the \windows\fonts directory, makes it easier to manage the system.

Note that fonts copied to \windows or \windows\fonts do not persist over power cycles or cold boots. Use the copy file feature to persist them over power cycles or cold boots.

Using Additional Fonts in Native Applications

Any application written in EVC can use the additional fonts using either MFC or Win32 APIs. If a specified font is missing, the system uses an available font for display.

Using Additional Fonts in Managed Applications

All fonts installed in the system are available to the .Net Compact Framework during runtime.

8 - 16 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Using Additional Fonts in Browser Applications

Regardless of how you installed the font in the system, to reference it using a browser page, specify the font as a STYLE, or use FONT tags. Use intuitive names for the fonts (use FontViewer on a Windows desktop and locate the

Typeface Name

line), and use quotes to enclose names with spaces. If the specified font is missing,

Internet Explorer uses its default font to display the text.

Things to Consider when Using Additional Fonts

Different font styles (e.g., bold and italic) often require separate TTF files; be sure to provide all required styles. Do not reference styles by name (e.g., Arial Bold); set the style separately from the font (e.g., using a “b” or “strong” tag, or a style).

For best results, do not direct the system font path to a storage card (PCMCIA), as this can negatively impact system performance. If this method is necessary, test the use of a storage card thoroughly for fonts to ensure proper operation.

Most Web pages contain information that tells the browser what language encoding (the language and character set) to use. If the page does not include that information, and the Language Encoding

Auto-Select feature is on, Internet Explorer can usually determine the appropriate language encoding. If not, manually select it using

View

menu >

Encoding > More

, then select the appropriate language.

NOTE

If the Auto-Select feature or a specific language pack is not installed, Internet Explorer prompts you to download the files. Adding languages does not guarantee Web pages display in the preferred language.

System Features 8 - 17

Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard)

Use the input panel (virtual keyboard) on the touchscreen of the MK2200 to enter information.

To access the

Input Panel

, tap the icon in the icon tray. To enter information, use a stylus to select the keys on the input panel. To close the

Input Panel

, double-tap the icon.

NOTE

To access the virtual keyboard, press the physical buttons B and C simultaneously.

Figure 8-1

Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard)

NOTE

Use Ctrl-C to copy text, and Ctrl-V to paste text.

8 - 18 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Microsoft WordPad

Microsoft

WordPad

is an application that allows creating, editing, and viewing documents on the MK2200.

Password-protect a document if desired.

Figure 8-2

Using WordPad

To open a file on the MK2200, tap

File > Open

. The file must be in a format that

WordPad

can read (or convert).

WordPad

can explore the MK2200 to find files stored on the device. Select a file in the list and tap

OK

to open it.

Figure 8-3

Open File Dialog Box

Enter information in

WordPad

as with any text editing program. Select font type, style, color, and size. Use the

input panel to enter typed text into a document. See

Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard) on page 8-17

.

To format or edit text, select the text by dragging the stylus across the text. To search a document for specific text, tap

Edit > Find

.

To change the zoom magnification, tap

View > Zoom

. Select the percentage. Select a higher percentage to enter text and a lower one to see more of the document.

If opening a document created on a host computer, tap

View > Wrap to Window

to see the entire document.

System Features 8 - 19

Windows Media Player

The MK2200 plays digital audio and video files using Windows

®

Media Player

. To launch Windows Media

Player, tap

Start > Windows Media

, or double-tap the

Media Player

icon on the MK2200 desktop.

Indicates the progress of the current track

Slide to adjust volume

Tap to turn volume on/off

Tap to skip to the next track

Tap to play a previous track

Tap to stop

Tap to play or pause

Figure 8-4

Using Windows Media Player

Use the host computer to copy digital audio and video files to the MK2200. The MK2200 can play WMA, MP3,

WMV, MPEG4, and some WAV file formats.

Use the MK2200 SMDKs to customize the appearance of the

Media Player

.

For more information on using Media Player, tap the Web button to open the Windows Media web site. For sample source code that demonstrates using Media Player from a browser application, refer to the

MK2000_WebKSS_Install+SourceCode.doc

file, which is part of the Web Kiosk Software Suite (see

page 6-2)

.

Internet Explorer

Use Microsoft Internet Explorer (6.0 compliant) to view Web pages on the MK2200. Use the MK2200 SMDKs to customize the appearance of Internet Explorer.

Use the RDM to configure some parameters of Internet Explorer. See

Internet Explorer on page 3-6

.

To access Internet Explorer, tap

Start > Programs > Internet Explorer

or double-tap the

Internet Explorer

icon on the MK2200 desktop. The internet browser window opens (see

Figure 8-5

).

The MK2200 OS also includes kioskie.exe, which hides the toolbar and the Windows Start bar, menus, title bar, and status bar. Symbol recommends using kioskie.exe as the default browser when running web applications.

See

Browser Applications - Hiding Toolbars on page 8-13

.

For information on loading alternate fonts, see

Loading Additional Fonts on the MK2200 on page 8-15

.

8 - 20 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

For information on handling network disconnects and their associated error recovery pages such as error 404,

see

Browser Applications - Handling Network Disconnects on page 8-14

.

Browsing the Web

Go to a specific Web page in one of the following ways:

Tap

Favorites

, then tap the favorite to view. Note that new favorites added are not persisted as part of

Internet Explorer settings.

In the address bar at the top of the screen, enter the Web address using the input panel and tap the

Enter

button, or tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses..

Home Button

Favorites Menu

Refresh Button

Stop Button

Back Button

Search Button

Figure 8-5

Internet Explorer

System Features 8 - 21

Printer Object Test

Use the

Printer Object Test Page

to debug serial printer connections and to print test bar codes, bitmaps, and text. Within Internet Explorer, select

Favorites > Printer Object Test Page

.

The

Printer Language

drop-down menu lists supported printers, and includes the following information for each printer:

Programming language acronym (for example, CPL)

Printer company (for example, Zebra)

Supported printers (for example, Epson, Zebra. See

Printing on page 3-20

for models).

Figure 8-6

Printer Object Test Page

8 - 22 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

MSR Object Test

Use the

MSR Object Test Page

to test the MSR from the browser application. Select

Favorites > MSR Object Test

Page

to load the MSR Object Test Page

.

Figure 8-7

MSR Object Test Page

System Features 8 - 23

Scanner Object Test

Use the

Scanner Object Test Page

for debugging scanner setup from the browser application. Select

Favorites >

Scanner Object Test Page

to load the Scanner Object Test Page.

Figure 8-8

Scanner Object Test Page

8 - 24 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Audio Object Test

Use the

Audio Object Test Page

for debugging Audio Object setup from the browser application. Select

Favorites > Audio Object Test Page

to load the Audio Object Test Page.

Figure 8-9

Audio Object Test Page

System Features 8 - 25

MicroKiosk Object Test

Use the

MK Object Test Page

for debugging MicroKiosk Object setup from the browser application. Select

Favorites > MK Object Test Page

to load the MicroKiosk Object Test Page.

Figure 8-10

MicroKiosk Object Test Page

8 - 26 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 9

Chapter 9

Chapter 9

Software Development Environments

Software Development Environments

Overview

The MK2200 operating system is Windows CE.NET 4.2, which supports the major technologies and functions needed to develop applications in any of the following environments:

Native Windows

®

CE applications in C and C++

Managed .NET applications in C# or VB.NET *

Browser-based applications in VBScript or JScript

* C# and VB.NET require a separate installation of the .NET Compact Framework (.NETCF).

Symbol Mobility Developer Kits (SMDKs)

The following software developer kits are available for the MK2200:

SMDK for C - for developing native C/C++ applications

SMDK for the Web - for developing browser-based applications

PocketBrowser v2.01 support for web development

SMDK for .NET - for developing managed .NET applications in C# or VB.NET.

All Symbol Mobility Developer Kits are available as free downloads from the Symbol DevZone: http://devzone.symbol.com/.

Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for C

The Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for C is based on industry-standard Microsoft

®

Windows

®

CE development tools and enables development of native C and C++ applications. Use this developer kit in conjunction with

Microsoft

®

Embedded Visual C++ 4.0 Service Pack 3 and Symbol’s Platform SDK (PSDK) for MK2000c42.

SMDK for C includes the following components:

Standard Symbol C API Libraries

MK2200-specific C API Libraries

Help file containing a C API Reference Guide

Sample applications with full source code.

9 - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Sample Applications

The sample applications are included as a learning tool, to show developers how to interface with the Symbol

C API functions. Some of the sample applications contained in the kit include:

Hello

: A simple Hello World application.

DisplayTest

: Displays various colors on the LCD screen.

KeyCheck

: A keyboard checking utility that displays the keys pressed on the device and their associated

WM_MESSAGE.

ScanSamp2

: Demonstrates the bar code scan engine (and external scanner).

MSRSamp2

: Displays the MSR track data when a card is swiped.

KioskWedge

: Provides non-scanning aware applications the ability to receive scanned bar code data.

KioskWedge interfaces with the scanner driver, captures selected types of bar code data, and sends the bar code data as keystrokes to the window with the keyboard focus (if any).

MemTest

: Displays the amount of available memory. Allocate and free blocks of memory to see how available memory changes.

Win32PrintSamp

: Prints a sample page to a connected printer.

NOTE

The MK2200 supports the Signature Capture API via the SMDK for C only. Refer to the

Symbol Mobility Developer Kit version 1.4 or later, under MK Series C APIs - Signature Capture.

Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for the Web

The Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for the Web enables development of browser-based applications written in

VBScript or Jscript. Use this developer kit in conjunction with any web page editor such as Microsoft Front

Page or Notepad. It contains the following components:

Documentation for the Symbol ActiveX Object library *

Sample HTML/Jscript applications

Outside the SMDK for the Web, see

Chapter 6, Web Kiosk Software Suite

and

Web KSS Source Code

Index on page 6-23

.

* The ActiveX objects are built into the MK2200 operating system and do not need to be loaded.

The MK2200 ships with Internet Explorer CE version 6.0 browser, which supports VBScript and Jscript. See http:\\www.microsoft.com for information on Internet Explorer CE version 6.0 features and limitations.

The MK2200 operating system also includes the KioskIE.exe browser, which runs in full screen mode without the browser toolbar. See

Browser Applications - Hiding Toolbars on page 8-13

.

ActiveX objects provide control over the scan engine (and external scanner), four programmable buttons, microphone, MSR, and printers. For information on loading alternate fonts onto the MK2200, see

Loading

Additional Fonts on the MK2200 on page 8-15

.

NOTE

MK2200 supports only the following Active X Objects/Controls: Printer, BarcodeReader,

AudioManager, MKUtility, and MSR.

Software Development Environments 9 - 3

PocketBrowser v2.01 for the Web

The Symbol PocketBrowser is a web development kit that provides access to the functionalities of a Symbol device. The PocketBrowser is used across all vertical markets and in a wide variety of applications, enabling developers and integrators to provide advanced Web-based solutions for Symbol devices. Transfer a

PocketBrowser application from one Symbol device to another seamlessly without recompiling or rewriting it.

PocketBrowser features include:

Blocking users from the Microsoft operating system

Exposing the full screen area to the Web application designer

Seamless integration with bar code scanning

Wireless connectivity

Magnetic stripe readers.

Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for .NET

The Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET allows Microsoft

®

.NET Compact Framework developers to create managed (C# and VisualBasic.NET) applications that harness Symbol value-add features on the MK2200. Use this developer kit in conjunction with Microsoft

®

Visual Studio.NET 2003.

The SMDK for .NET includes the following components:

Class libraries

Sample applications

Documentation describing how to use the methods for each class library

Outside the SMDK for .NET, see

Chapter 7, C# Kiosk Software Suite

and

C# KSS Source Code Index on page 7-12

.

9 - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Appendix A

Appendix A

Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications

For the latest technical specification information for the MK2200, visit: http://www.symbol.com/MK2200

A - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Appendix B

Appendix B

RF Network Configuration

RF Network Configuration

Overview

There are two alternative platform partitions available for the MK2250 that enable different RF clients to configure the 11 Mbps wireless connection.

To implement WPA enterprise-level wireless security in the wireless connection, use the Aegis Client version 2.1.4 to configure the wireless connection.

Alternatively, use Symbol Mobile Companion version 3.9.3.76.

NOTE

Mobile Companion supports WPA Home, but not WPA Enterprise.

Automated Launch of Aegis Client

By default, the Aegis Client launches at startup and runs in the background on MK2200s using platform partition 2046c42Plat64M30x. The AegisEnable.reg file included in this partition enables this. Deleting this file or renaming its .reg extension causes Mobile Companion to launch upon boot up. In this case, to access Aegis

Client double-tap its desktop icon or press all four of the MK2200’s buttons simultaneously. The Aegis Client icon then appears in the task bar; select this to display its configuration window.

To close the Aegis Client window but continue to run the application in the background, select

Client

tab >

Close

. To exit the application completely, select

Client

tab >

Exit

.

B - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Aegis Client

Install the Aegis Client included in the platform partition 2046c42Plat64Mxxx.hex onto the MK2200 to implement WPA enterprise wireless security. Wireless MK2200s ship from the factory with this client installed.

Use the Aegis Client to configure the MK2200’s Spectrum24 wireless network settings. See Aegis Client documentation for more information.

Persisting Aegis Settings

To permanently save the settings configured by the Aegis Client, run

Start > Programs > Tools > Save Aegis

Configuration

. This creates the \Applications\Aegis.reg file containing the configured parameters.

NOTE

To deploy the same Aegis settings on multiple MK2200 devices, copy the Aegis.reg file to other MK2200 devices.

To save certificates installed on the MK2200 for use by Aegis Client, run

Start > Programs > Tools > Save

Certificates

. This preserves the certificate across cold boot cycles.

Using Certificates with Aegis Client

When the MK2200 is operating with the default system time after a cold boot (1st of June 1999 12:00:00 AM) and cannot update its time over SNTP because it is not connected to the network, perform the following to use certificates with Aegis:

1.

Manually set the date and time.

2.

Install the certificate.

3.

Create a bat file, e.g.,

SetDate.bat

, as follows: date mm-dd-yyyy time hh:mm:ss

4.

Create a folder named

StartUp

in the

Application

folder, and copy this bat file to it.

5.

Use Aegis to connect to the required network with the installed certificate.

6.

Select

Start > Programs > Tools > Save Certificates

and

Start > Programs > Tools > Save Aegis Configuration

to save them over power cycles.

IP Configuration of Aegis Client

The Aegis Client does not provide an interface to configure IP settings applicable for NETWLAN adapter. To configure IP settings, on the MK2200, select

Start > Settings > Network & Dial-up Connections > NETWLAN

and set the configurations. Then select

Start > Programs > Tools > Save Aegis Configuration

to preserve the settings over cold boot cycles.

Appendix B: RF Network Configuration B - 3

Mobile Companion (11 Mbps Radio)

The MK2200 supports wireless communication using Spectrum24 wireless LAN connection. This requires properly configured Access Points (APs) within the facility. Refer to the AP documentation to set up the wireless LAN hardware.

Use the

Mobile Companion

utility to configure the MK2200 wireless network settings. The

Mobile Companion

icon appears in the task tray (see

Figure B-1 on page B-3

), and indicates MK2200 signal strength as follows:

Icon Status

Excellent signal strength

Very good signal strength

Good signal strength

Fair signal strength

Poor signal strength

Out-of-network range (not associated)

The

Mobile Companion

utility starts automatically if the MK2200 is equipped with a Spectrum24 11 Mbps card.

The status icon appears in the task tray and changes in real-time to reflect the signal strength and availability of the adapter and the wireless network. Tap the icon to open the

Mobile Companion

menu.

Mobile Companion Menu

Mobile Companion icon

Task tray

Figure B-1

Mobile Companion Menu

NOTE

Some options set using Mobile Companion are not persisted after a cold boot.

B - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

When the menu opens, select

Status

,

WLAN Profiles

,

Find WLANs

, or

Options

.

Table B-1

Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions

Menu Item

Status

Description

Displays the current status and information for the wireless connection.

Signal

tab - displays radio signal transmission strength from the adapter

(using its current profile) to the associated AP.

Info

tab - displays software, driver, firmware, hardware, and country information for the current profile.

IP Status

tab - displays network address information.

Ping

tab - displays signal strength data and data rate, and performs data transmission tests between the MK2200 and associated AP or client.

APs

tab - displays APs with the same ESSID as the current MK2200 profile.

Set the MK2200 roaming capabilities.

WLAN Profiles Lists the current profiles and allows adding, editing, and deleting profiles.

Under

Edit

, the

Mode, Encryption, IP Config

, and

Power

tabs show the

ESSID, security settings, network address information, and power consumption level for that profile. See

page B-6 .

Find WLANs

Options

Displays a list of Spectrum24 networks (APs and networked peers) available to the MK2200 for association. The networks are listed by ESSID. Tap a network and tap

Connect

to interoperate with the AP representing that network. See

Find WLANs on page B-16

for more information.

Displays settings for configuring system sounds, AP and MK2200 association capabilities, profile roaming options, and the password protecting the Mobile Companion utility.

Appendix B: RF Network Configuration B - 5

Configuring Mobile Companion

Mobile Companion is launched at power-up if an 11 Mbps Spectrum24 radio and driver are installed in the

MK2200. The Mobile Companion icon appears in the task tray. If it does not launch, manually launch Mobile

Companion on the MK2200 by double clicking

\Windows\EVMON.EXE

.

Select

WLAN Profiles

from the

Mobile Companion

menu to view, connect to, create, and edit a profile. A completed profile contains adapter configuration settings for use in different locations to connect to a wireless network.

Options available in the WLAN Profile window are:

Select any relevant profile from the list and tap

Connect

to set that profile as the active profile. The active profile displays the transmit and receive icon to the left. Once selected, the MK2200 uses the

ESSID, encryption, and power consumption settings configured for that profile.

Select a profile from the list and tap

Edit

to make changes to the profile. See

Editing Profiles on page

B-6

.

Tap

New

to set the profile name and ESSID on the

Mode

tab. Use the

Encryption, IP Config

, and

Power

tabs to set security, network address information, and power consumption level for the new profile.

Select a profile to delete from the list and tap

Delete

to remove that profile.

Select a profile from the list and tap

Move Up

or

Move Down

to order the profile. If the current profile association is lost, Mobile Companion attempts to associate with the first profile in the list, then the next, until a new association is achieved.

Configuring the Default Profile

1.

Tap on the task tray icon and select

WLAN Profiles

from the

Mobile Companion

menu. The

WLAN Profile

s window displays existing profiles.

Figure B-2

WLAN Profiles

2.

If no changes are required for the profile, select

Default

and tap

Connect

to set this as the active profile.

The

Default

profile displays the transmit and receive icon to the left.

To edit the ESSID, operating mode, profile power consumption, and security parameters first, see

Editing

Profiles on page B-6

.

B - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Editing Profiles

Mode Tab

1.

To change the ESSID and operating mode for a profile, select the profile and tap

Edit

to display the

Mode

tab.

Infrastructure Mode

Figure B-3

Mode Tab

2.

Set the operating mode from the

Operating Mode

drop-down list. Choose

Infrastructure

(the default mode) to enable the MK2200 to transmit and receive data with an AP.

Select the country of operation for the MK2200 from the

Country:

drop-down list. This should match the

APs country setting, and be appropriate for the country of operation. Select

International

if using the

MK2200 with a non-Symbol AP or a pre-AP 4131 model.

3.

To save the Mobile Companion settings and retain them across cold boot cycles, tap

Start > Tools > Save

Spectrum24 Configuration

.

Appendix B: RF Network Configuration B - 7

Authentication Tab

Select the Authentication tab to configure server-based authentication. Select one of the following

Authentication options from the

Authentication

drop-down list.

None - Default setting when authentication is not required on the network. The client adapter does not use any authentication scheme when Open System is selected on the

Encryption

tab.

Kerberos (see

Table B-2

)

LEAP (see

Table B-3

)

EAP-TLS (see

Table B-4

)

PEAP (see

Table B-5

).

Kerberos Authentication

Credential Caching Settings

(Kerberos Options)

Figure B-4

Mobile Companion - Authentication Tab (Kerberos)

B - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table B-2

Authentication Tab Fields - Kerberos

Authentication

Kerberos

(see

Figure B-4

)

Description

Kerberos is a different form of 128-bit data security. An adapter is required to have its request for access point resources authenticated with a Kerberos server before the server permits the access point to transmit and receive data with the associated adapter. When Kerberos is selected, the

KDC

and

Realm

entry fields appear. The

KDC

field should remain with the default

KDC name (krbtgt) unless it is changed in the server. Enter the name of the server that hosts the Kerberos KDC in the

Realm

field. The KDC is located on a server and maintains information about the access points and users it supports. The KDC also permits the transmission and receipt of data once the credentials of the user are verified.

Tap

Kerberos Options

to configure different caching modes for Kerberos credentials. When connecting to a Kerberos supported profile, the system can prompt for the associated user name and password at specified instances during the authentication process. Caching of credentials is optional.

Kerberos Options:

Select any combination of the following Kerberos Credential Caching settings:

Reset

: When selected, the system prompts the user for the username and password upon a warm boot.

Connect

: When selected, the system prompts the user for login information when the system initiates a connection to the ESSID.

Time

: When selected, the system requests a user name and password after the specified time parameter. Available time parameters are specified as an

Interval

(in minutes) or

At (hh:mm)

a specified time (chosen with the pull-down menu). If a time option is not selected, authentication continues without a user name and password verification.

Resume

: When enabled, the system prompts the user for username and password after the system is suspended and subsequently resumed. If disabled, the system prompts for a username and password only if the user's credentials are not in the registry.

Appendix B: RF Network Configuration B - 9

Figure B-5

Mobile Companion - Authentication Tab (LEAP)

Table B-3

Authentication Tab Fields - LEAP

Authentication

LEAP

(see

Figure B-5

)

Description

Select this option to enable LEAP authentication. LEAP is founded on mutual authentication. The AP and the mobile computer attempting to connect to it require authentication before access to the network is permitted.

B - 10 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

EAP-TLS Authentication Install / View Certificates

Figure B-6

Mobile Companion - Authentication Tab (EAP-TLS)

Table B-4

Authentication Tab Fields - EAP/TLS

Authentication Description

EAP/TLS

(see

Figure B-6

)

EAP/TLS is an authentication scheme through IEEE 802.1x. It authenticates users and ensures only valid users can connect to the network. It also restricts unauthorized users from accessing transmitted information. EAP/TLS achieves this through secure authentication certificates.

NOTE

Run Start > Programs > Tools > Save Certificates to persist the certificate on the

MK2250 across cold boot cycles.

Appendix B: RF Network Configuration B - 11

PEAP Authentication

Figure B-7

Mobile Companion - Authentication Tab (PEAP)

Install / View Certificates

Table B-5

Authentication Tab Fields - PEAP

Authentication

PEAP

(see

Figure B-7

)

Description

Select this option to enable PEAP authentication. This method uses a digital certificate to verify and authenticate an user identity.

NOTE

Run Start > Programs > Tools > Save Certificates to persist the certificate on the

MK2250 across cold boot cycles.

B - 12 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Encryption Tab

Select the

Encryption

tab to set the adapter profile security level by configuring the encryption scheme and corresponding keys. Select an option (Open System, WEP, Keyguard-MCM, TKIP (WPA)) from the Encryption drop-down list.

Figure B-8

Encryption Tab

The absence of a physical connection makes wireless links vulnerable to information theft. Encryption is an efficient method for preventing data theft and improving data security.

If an Access Point (AP) is set to 40-bit and an adapter is set to 128-bit, the adapter can associate to the AP.

However, no data transmission and reception can take place when these settings are in place.

Select one of the following

Encryption

options from the drop-down list:

Appendix B: RF Network Configuration B - 13

Open System

(no encryption)

WEP

Select this option when no data packet encryption is needed over the network.

This option provides no security for data transmitted over the network. The window displays only the

OK

and

Cancel

buttons.

Select this option to use WEP keys for encryption. The window displays several radio buttons and edit buttons to configure the WEP keys.

Specify the keylength by selecting the 40-bit or the 128-bit radio button (128-bit is the default). Enter WEP keys in the edit boxes. The number of edit boxes is determined by the selected key length (10 Hex digit value for 40 bit keys, 26 Hex digit values for 128-bit keys).

Use the

Key

radio buttons to configure the four WEP keys. The adapter uses the selected key. Select the

ResetKeys

button to set the encryption key to the default values.

TKIP (WPA)

The default Hex digit keys are visible any time they are used. As a security precaution the WEP keys appear in asterisks ("*") within the Encryption key fields.

If the associated access point uses an optional Passkey, the "active" adapter

WLAN profile must use a Passkey as well. The Passkey is a plain text representation of the WEP keys displayed in the Encryption property window.

Use the Passkey to enter WEP key data without having to remember the entire

40-bit (10 character) or 128-bit (26 character) Hex digit string.

Tap

Passkey

. On the

Passkey

screen, enter an easy-to-remember character string in the range 4 to 32 to use as the WEP algorithm, then select

OK

. The access point transforms the Passkey string into a set of four WEP keys using

MD5 algorithms and displays them in the WEP fields. The selected adapter profile uses these new WEP keys, and behaves as if the keys were entered manually.

Select this option for the client adapter to use Wireless Protected Access (WPA) through TKIP. Enter the pre-shared keys in the edit boxes. Tap

ClearKey

to clear all keys and enter new key values. Tap

Passkey

to display the

Passkey

screen.

Enter an easy-to-remember 8 to 63 character string.

B - 14 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

IP Config Tab

Tap the

IP Config

tab to configure the following MK2200 profile network address parameters: IP address, subnet, gateway, DNS, and WINS. Changes made within the

IP Config

tab only impact the profile selected in the

Mode

tab and do not impact the network address parameters configured for other profiles.

Figure B-9

Mobile Companion - IP Config Tab (DHCP)

Select

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

from the

IP Type

drop-down list to obtain a leased IP address and network configuration information from a DHCP server. DHCP is the default setting for the

MK2200 profile. When DHCP is selected, the IP address fields are read-only.

Select

Static

to manually assign the IP, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS, and WINS addresses used by the MK2200 profile.

Figure B-10

Mobile Companion - IP Config Tab (Static)

Appendix B: RF Network Configuration B - 15

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

DNS

WINS

The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other. Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end. This address is called the

IP Address

(Internet Protocol address). Each node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address made up of a network identifier and a host identifier. Enter the IP address as a dotted-decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period, for example,

192.168.7.27.

Most TCP/IP networks use subnets to manage routed IP addresses. Dividing an organization's network into subnets allows it to connect to the Internet with a single shared network address, for example, 255.255.255.0.

The default gateway is a device used to forward IP packets to and from a remote destination.

The

Domain Name System

(DNS) is a distributed Internet directory service.

DNS translates domain names and IP addresses, and controls Internet email delivery. Most Internet service requires DNS. For example, if DNS is not configured, Web sites cannot be located and/or email delivery fails.

WINS

is a Microsoft

®

Net BIOS name server. WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations.

Power Tab

The MK2200 always uses the

Automatic Power Saving Mode

setting, which provides the best network performance.

Persisting Mobile Companion Settings

To permanently save the Mobile Companion settings run

Start > Programs > Tools > Save Spectrum24

Configuration

. This creates

\Applications\Spectrum24.reg

file containing the configured parameters.

NOTE

To deploy the same Mobile Companion settings on multiple MK2250 devices, copy the spectrum24.reg file to other devices.

B - 16 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Find WLANs

Select

Find WLANs

from the Mobile Companion menu to list the ESSIDs of active wireless LANs operating in the vicinity of the MK2200.

Figure B-11

Available WLAN Networks

Select a WLAN ESSID and tap

Connect

to view the

Mode

tab. The

Profile Name:

and

802.11 ESSID:

fields reflect the ESSID selected.

Appendix B: RF Network Configuration B - 17

Status

To view the status of the wireless network connection, select

Status

from the

Mobile Companion

menu.

1.

Tap the

Signal

tab to view a real-time graph of the signal quality of the MK2200 to the associated AP

(Infrastructure Mode only), including the number of times the MK2200 roams to and from APs, the current data rate, and the network status. Signal quality indicates how clearly the adapter can hear the associated

AP.

Figure B-12

Mobile Companion - Signal Tab

Missed Beacons

Transmit Retries

Signal

The amount of beacons (uniform system packets broadcast by the AP to keep the network synchronized) missed by the MK2200. The fewer the missed beacons the better the signal. If the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized by an excess of missed

AP beacons. If the LED is red, consider associating with a different AP to reduce the amount of missed beacons and improve the signal.

The number of data packets retransmitted by the MK2200. The fewer transmit retries the stronger the signal. If the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized. If the LED is red, consider associating with a different AP to reduce the amount of transmit retries and improve the signal.

The Relative Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) of the signal transmitted between the AP and MK2200. If the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized. If the LED is red, an association with a different AP could be warranted to improve the signal.

NOTE

The button combination ABCD is mapped to the Signal Strength function (0xC6) and launches the Signal tab. See

Table 8-5 on page 8-8

.

B - 18 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

2.

Tap the

Info

tab to view the MK2200 current software and driver revision data and the operating parameters of the current profile.

Figure B-13

Mobile Companion - Info Tab

Version

Information

Current Status

The MK2200's software, driver, firmware and hardware versions, and country information. This data is consistent for the MK2200 regardless of the current profile.

The MK2200 current Profile Name, ESSID, and Encryption mode.

MK2200 performance is displayed using a verbal indicator of signal strength. MK2200 operating information differs depending on the current profile.

3.

Tap the

IP Status

tab to view the MK2200 network address information. Unlike the

IP Config

tab in Finding

WLANs, the

IP Status

tab is view-only with no user-configurable data fields.

Figure B-14

Mobile Companion - IP Status Tab

Appendix B: RF Network Configuration B - 19

IP Type

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

DNS

WINS

MAC Address

Host Name

If DHCP was selected from the

IP Config

tab, leased IP address and network address data appears. If Static was selected, the values entered in the

IP Config

tab on page B-14

appear.

Each node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address.

Enter the

IP Address

in dotted-decimal notation, for example,

192.168.7.27.

All network adapters on a TCP/IP network require a

Subnet Mask

. See the network administrator for the appropriate mask for the network.

The

Gateway

forwards IP packets to and from a remote destination.

The Domain Name System (

DNS

) is a distributed Internet directory service.

DNS

translates domain names and IP addresses, and controls

Internet e-mail delivery. Most Internet service requires

DNS

. For example, if

DNS

is not configured, Web sites cannot be located or e-mail delivery fails.

WINS

is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server.

WINS

eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations.

An IEEE 48-bit address factory-assigned to the MK2200 to uniquely identify the adapter at the physical layer.

The name of the MK2200.

4.

Tap

Renew

to refresh the information displayed on the

IP Status

tab.

Tap the

Ping

tab to send and receive ICMP ping packets across the network to the specified IP address.

Figure B-15

Mobile Companion - Ping Tab

-

Select or enter a target device IP address from the

IP

drop-down list.

-

Select the size of the packet transmission from the

Size

drop-down list.

-

Tap

Start Test

to begin the ping test.

-

Tap

Stop Test

to terminate the ping test.

-

The average mega-bits per second, signal strength, data rate currently in use, test statistics, and round trip (RT) times appear for each test. The associated AP MAC address also appears. The signal strength level and the data transmission rate appear in real-time bar graphs.

B - 20 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

5.

Select the

APs

tab (Infrastructure operating mode only) to view APs with the same ESSID as the MK2200 profile.

Figure B-16

Mobile Companion - APs Tab

The associated AP displays a radio wave radiating from its antenna to indicate its associated status.

Tapping on the icon displays a menu with

Set Mandatory

and

Set Roaming

options.

-

Select the

Set Mandatory

item to prohibit the MK2200 from associating with a different AP. The letter

M

displays on top of the icon.

-

Select

Set Roaming

to allow the MK2200 to roam to any AP with a better signal. These settings are temporary and never saved to the registry.

Tap

Refresh

to update the list of APs with the same ESSID.

Options

Changes made to

Options

are not persisted across cold boot cycles.

Appendix C

Appendix C

Rapid Deployment Client

Rapid Deployment Client

Overview

The Rapid Deployment (RD) Client facilitates software downloads to a device from a Mobility Services Platform

(MSP) Console’s FTP server.

The MK2200 ships from the factory with RD Client version 1.6. You can upgrade this client over a network.

When software packages are transferred to the FTP server, the MK2200 on the wireless network can download them to the device. The location of software packages are encoded in RD bar codes. When the

MK2200 scans an RD programming bar code(s), the software package(s) is downloaded from the FTP server to the MK2200. Multiple MK2200s can scan a single RD bar code.

NOTE

For information about the MSP Console, MSP Lite/MSP Enterprise servers, and creating RD bar codes, refer to the MSP User Guide.

Rapid Deployment Window

The

Rapid Deployment

window displays bar code scan status and provides features for resetting and exiting the application. To launch the RD application on the MK2200, tap

Start > Programs > Rapid Deployment Client

.

Figure C-1

Rapid Deployment Window

C - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table C-1

Rapid Deployment Window

Text Box/Button

Please scan all of the bar codes...

Description

This text box displays the status of a scanned bar code.

Waiting

- indicates the MK2200 is ready to scan a bar code.

OK

- indicates the MK2200 successfully scanned a bar code.

If there are no bar codes left to scan, the

Rapid Deployment

Configuring

window displays (see

Figure C-3

).

Bar codes left to scan...

About

This text box displays a list of any remaining bar codes to scan (1D bar codes only). When all required bar codes are scanned successfully, the

Rapid Deployment Configuring

window displays (see

Figure C-3

).

Tap

About

to display the

Rapid Deployment Client Info

window.

Reset

Exit

Tap

Reset

to remove any previously scanned data.

Tap

Exit

to close the application. A confirmation window displays:

Note: Closing the application prior to scanning all required bar codes discards any scanned data collected up to that point.

Appendix C: Rapid Deployment Client C - 3

Scanning RD Bar Codes

When the MK2200 scans and successfully decodes a single or multiple RD bar codes, the data encoded in the bar code can:

Reset the MK2200’s connection profile. A connection profile is a set of Mobile Companion parameters that the MK2200 uses to access the wireless network.

Initiate downloads of one or more software packages from an FTP server to the MK2200.

NOTE

Currently, RD only recognizes AirBeam version 2.16 software packages.

To scan an RD bar code:

1.

Obtain the appropriate RD bar code(s) from the MSP administrator.

2.

Launch the MK2200’s scan engine by tapping

Start > Programs > System

menu.

3.

With the

System

menu open, from the toolbar, click on

Configuration > Turn Scanner On

. Leave the

System

menu open while using RD Client or the scan engine turns off.

4.

Launch the RD application on the MK2200 by tapping

Start > Programs > Rapid Deployment Client

. The

Rapid Deployment

window displays.

Ready to Scan

No Bar Codes Left to Scan

Figure C-2

Rapid Deployment Window

Ready to Scan

Bar Codes 1, 10, 11, 12 Left to Scan

5.

Scan the appropriate bar code(s) to complete the configuration and/or download. For information about

scanning with the MK2200, see

Bar Code Scanning on page 1-8

.

a.

A PDF417 bar code (2D bar code) can contain all download data in a single bar code. In this case, only one bar code may be required to scan.

b.

Multi-part linear bar codes (1D bar codes) can require scanning several bar codes. Scan bar codes in any order. The text box under

Bar codes left to scan...

shows the remaining bar codes to scan (see

Figure C-2

).

C - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

6.

After scanning all appropriate bar codes, the MK2200 connects to the server and the

Rapid Deployment

Configuring

window displays while network settings are configured.

Figure C-3

Rapid Deployment Window - Configuring

NOTE

If the MK2200 cannot connect to the server, it retries until you cancel (exit) the application.

If failure to connect to the server persists, see the MSP administrator.

7.

When configuration is complete: a. A new Mobile Companion profile is created on the MK2200 from the data encoded in the bar code(s)

scanned. See

Appendix B, RF Network Configuration

for more information about wireless profiles.

b. The designated package(s) are downloaded from the FTP server.

Appendix D

Appendix D

Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

Overview

Use these sample bar codes with the Web Kiosk Software Suite.

Wide Screen TV

0

11048 83112

9

D - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

DVD Player

0

11096 38390

8

White Correction Fluid

0

70330 50367

0

Glue Stick

Appendix D: Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes D - 3

0

71709 00166

7

Transparent Tape

0

51131 77138

3

D - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Standard Staples

0

74711 35440

0

Tylenol

3

00450 44909

2

Rolaids

Appendix D: Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes D - 5

3

12546 65021

3

CD

0

75678 12772

4

D - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Color Printer - Ink Cartridge

\

7

34646 89800

3

KichenAid Mixer

3

6 0 2 5 4 8 3 2 4 7

6

Employee Badge

John Ryan

(Code 128)

Employee Badge

John Ryan

Appendix D: Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes D - 7

56842

Loyalty Card

Clark Kent

(Code 39)

Loyalty Card

Clark Kent

4125279101

D - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

2D Bar Code (PDF417)

Text Reads: “You have just scanned a PDF417 bar code using the MK2000!"

Appendix E

Appendix E

C# Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

C# Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

Overview

Use these sample bar codes with the C# Kiosk Software Suite.

Pants UPC-A

Pants UPC-A

DEMO

3

0 0 4 5 0 4 4 9 0 9

2

E - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Transparent Tape

Scotch Tape UPC-A

DEMO

3

1 2 5 4 6 6 5 0 2 1

3

CD

0

75678 12772

4

Employee Badge

John Ryan

(Code 128)

Employee Badge

John Ryan

Appendix E: C# Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes E - 3

56842

Loyalty Card

Clark Kent

(Code 39)

Loyalty Card Code 39

Clark Kent

4125279101

E - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Appendix F

Appendix F

Terminal Configuration Manager

Terminal Configuration Manager

Overview

Use the Terminal Configuration Manager (TCM) to specify a group of files to use when creating a partition and to load partitions from a host computer into the MK2200 flash memory over a serial connection using the device’s Initial Program Loader (IPL).

TCM creates a

script

that contains information (commands to copy files) for building the image. TCM works with Explorer-type windows to view both the contents of the partitions and the source files directory structure, and performs functions including opening multiple scripts, dragging/dropping items from a drive/directory to the script, and renaming and deleting files in the script. When building the image, TCM adds all the files and directories referenced in the script to the image.

The Symbol MK2200 DCP (Device Configuration Package) includes TCM, standard script, and flash partition source files to use as a base for creating new scripts. These scripts are located in:

C:\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\MK2000cXX\vX.X\ TCMScripts

Download the installation files for TCM from http://devzone.symbol.com.

NOTE

Before creating a script to build a hex image, identify the files required (system files, drivers, applications, etc.) and their source directories to simplify the script building process.

To build a hex image using TCM:

Start TCM.

Create or modify a script.

Build the hex image.

Send the hex image.

F - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Starting Terminal Configuration Manager

To start TCM, select

Start > Programs > Symbol Device Configuration Packages > MK2000cXX vX.X

. The following screen displays two directory windows:

Script1

and

File Explorer

.

Figure F-1

Terminal Configuration Manager

Appendix F: Terminal Configuration Manager F - 3

Table F-1

lists the components of the TCM start-up screen.

Table F-1

TCM Start-Up Screen Components

Component

Script Window

Description

Associated with a script file containing the information to create a Flash

Disk image. This window is the

target

window, or the primary TCM window to create a script or change a script file contents by copying, deleting, and renaming files and directories. More than one script window can open at a time.

The Script Window consists of the Directory Tree Pane on the left and the Directory Contents Pane on the right. The Directory Contents Pane lists subordinate directories and files of each partition.

File Explorer A

read-only source

window for files and/or directories to include in the script.

Tool Bar Contains the tools below for taking action on a script.

Create a new script file.

Check script for existing files.

Open a script file.

Select the hex image to load.

Save a script file.

Tile windows.

View script properties.

Build a script.

View large icons.

View small icons.

Build and send the hex image to the device.

Preferences.

About TCM.

View list.

F - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Defining Script Properties

Before a script is created, define script properties, including the type of device, flash type, number of disks being created, and the memory configuration of each disk partition.

To define script properties:

1.

With TCM open, click on the Script Window to make it the active window.

2.

From the

Script

menu, select the

Properties

option

OR

3.

Click on from the tool bar. The

Script Properties

window displays.

From the

Terminal

drop-down menu, select MK2200.

4.

From the

Disks

drop-down menu, select the number of disk partitions to create.

NOTE

The options available under the disks drop-down menu changes depending on the flash type. Some flash types only have one option for the number of disk partitions, others have two options.

5.

If selecting two or more partitions under the

Disk

drop-down menu, change the memory configuration of the two partitions if desired. Click on the up or down arrow for either partition to set the memory configuration to the desired value. As the one partition size is changed, the other partition changes accordingly.

6.

For each disk partition, set the Read/Write access option.

7.

The Script File Path displays the path of the selected script file.

8.

Select a Cushion percentage from the

Cushion

drop-down menu to specify the percent of flash reserved for cushion. Choosing a higher number reduces disk storage space, but also increases write performance on fragmented disks or disks becoming full. To speed the writing process, select as high a number as storage needs permit (up to 25%).

9.

Click

OK

to complete the settings.

Appendix F: Terminal Configuration Manager F - 5

Creating the Script for the Hex Image

On start-up, TCM displays the screen shown in

Figure F-1 on page F-2

, with the Script1 window and File

Explorer window pointing to the following directory:

C:\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\MK2000cXX\vX.X\TCMScripts

The Script1 window directory pane displays three partitions: Platform, Application, and Data. Files can be added to each of the partitions. TCM functionality includes:

Creating a new script file or open an existing script

Dragging and dropping existing files and directories to that script

Setting the script parameters

Saving the script

Reviewing and modifying the script.

Open a New or Existing Script

Scripts are created in the Script Window. To open a new script:

Choose

New

from the

File

menu, OR

Click on from the tool bar.

To open an existing script (e.g., a standard script provided in the DCP):

Choose

Open

from the

File

menu and select the script file name, OR

Click on from the toolbar and select the script file name, OR

Double-click on an existing script in the Script Browser window.

NOTE

Saving changes made to an existing script overwrites the original script. To use an original or Symbol-supplied standard script as a base and save the changes in a new script, use Save As instead of Save after making the changes and save to a different file name.

Copying Components to the Script

To copy files or directories to the script being generated:

1.

Click on the File Explorer Window to make it the active window.

2.

Click on the source directory in the Directory Tree Pane. TCM displays the directory contents in the

Contents Pane.

3.

Click on the file(s) and/or directory in File Explorer.

NOTE

Optionally, use the standard Windows® Shift+Left-tap and Control+Left-tap features to select multiple files and directories.

F - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

4.

Drag and drop the selected file(s) and/or directory from File Explorer to the target directory in the Script

Window,

OR

Click on the target directory and select the File Explorer Copy icon from the toolbar.

Saving the Script

To save changes to a new script:

1.

From the

File

menu, choose

Save As

,

OR

On the toolbar, click .

2.

Enter the path and filename. TCM appends a .TCM extension to the script.

3.

Click

OK

.

NOTE

TCM by default saves untitled scripts to the directory that the Script Browser is pointing to.

To save changes to an existing script:

From the

File

menu, choose

Save

, OR

On the toolbar, click .

NOTE

Saving changes to an existing script overwrites the original script.

To use an original or Symbol-supplied standard script as a base and save the changes in a new script, use

Save As instead of Save after making the changes and save to a different file name.

Appendix F: Terminal Configuration Manager F - 7

Building the Image

Before building the image, TCM checks the script to verify that all files referenced in the script exist.

NOTE

Performing a check is more important for existing scripts to ensure that files referenced in the script are still in the designated locations.

To check a script:

1.

In the Script Window, select the script.

2.

Save the script, if not already saved.

3.

From the

Script

menu, choose

Check

,

OR

On the toolbar, choose .

4.

TCM verifies that files referenced in the script exist on available drives and lists an error message in the

Errors found box for any missing files.

5.

Click

OK

to exit.

To build a script:

1.

In the Script Window, select the script to be built.

2.

From the

Script

menu, select

Build

,

OR

On the toolbar, choose . The Configure Build window displays.

3.

Select the item to build. If an application is selected to build, specify the application.

4.

Select Compression for the hex image, which reduces the size of most hex images to speed downloading.

Click

OK

.

5.

TCM performs a check. If the script has no errors, TCM builds the partition which can be transferred using

IPL to the MK2200 as a hex file.

If the build fails, TCM displays a message indicating which file(s) are missing.

If the amount of flash required by the script exceeds the image size, a TCM error results. To correct this, reduce the number of files in the partition. See

Defining Script Properties on page F-4

for more information on setting the image size.

F - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Sending the Hex Image

After building the hex file, download it to the device using IPL. See

IPL Menu Navigation on page G-3

for

detailed procedures.

Saving the Script

Save the script if changes were made since last saving it.

TCM Error Messages

Select the

Execute

button to validate the cells in the partition table. Cells highlighted in red contain an error.

Partition loading is disabled until all errors are corrected. Following are errors that TCM can encounter and possible solutions.

Table F-2

TCM Error Messages

Error

Failed to build images: flash file system DLL not loaded!

Failure finding directory xxx

Failure creating volume

Description/Solution

TCM could not load the DLL required to build images for the target flash file system. Reinstall TCM or recover the DLL.

Build process failed because directory xxx was not found.

Build process failed because a certain disk volume could not be created.

Failure adding system file to image

INVALID PATH

Nothing Selected To Build

Disk Full

Build process failed because TCM failed to add a certain system file to the disk image.

The path for the image file to build is not valid.

In the

Config Build

window, no item is selected to build.

Target Disk Full

TCM failed to create Hex image file at the selected path. Check available disk space.

Build process failed because TCM failed to add file to the image of a disk volume. Remove some files or increase the disk size.

Hex file is READ ONLY The Hex image file to be created exists and is read-only. Delete the existing file or change its attribute.

Error opening the file xxx with write access

TCM could not open file xxx with write access. Check if file is in use.

Failure creating binary file

Hex File To load is missing or invalid

TCM failed to open/create an intermediate binary file.

In

Load Terminal

window, the file selected to load has invalid status.

Could not locate device name in TCM.ini file

While loading the

Script Properties

window, TCM could not find the

TCM.ini section corresponding to the device type specified by the current opening script. Either TCM.ini or the script file is invalid.

Appendix F: Terminal Configuration Manager F - 9

Table F-2

TCM Error Messages (Continued)

Error

Incorrect disk sizes in TCM.ini file

Description/Solution

The total disk size specified in the script does not match the total disk size defined in the corresponding TCM.ini section. Check if the script is corrupt or the TCM.ini changed after the script was created.

INVALID DIRECTORY

One of the disk sizes is one sector in size

In

Script Properties

window, the selected System File Path is not a valid directory.

In

Script Properties

window, one of the disks is too small (one sector in size). This can cause problems when building images, especially when cushion is enabled. Increase the disk size.

INVALID VOLUME NAME

Corrupt TCM.INI file! (Invalid value of VolumeDivisor)

Invalid version of TCM script file

Corrupt or missing TCM.ini file

In

Script Properties

window, one of the volume labels is not valid.

The VolumeDivisor entry is missing or invalid in the TCM.ini. Reinstall

TCM or recover TCM.ini.

The TCM script was not created by this version of TCM.

TCM could not find TCM.ini file.

FAILED CONNECTION TO

COM PORT (Could not get status)

FAILED CONNECTION TO

TERMINAL (Terminal Not

Connected Properly/Terminal

Not Ready to Receive)

While downloading images to device, TCM failed to connect to the selected COM port. Ensure the COM port is free and properly configured.

While downloading images, TCM failed to connect to the device.

Ensure the correct flow control protocol is set, and the device is properly connected and in a listening state.

F - 10 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Creating a Splash Screen

The

Splash

screen appears briefly when the device cold boots. To generate a custom

Splash

screen, use a bitmap editor, such as

Paintbrush

.

Creating a Splash Screen on Color Terminals

1.

Create an 8 or 16-bit color bitmap with dimensions of BX x BY where:

-

BX is less than or equal to 640 pixels

-

BY is less than or equal to 480 pixels

2.

Choose

Build

, then check at least the

Splash

screen item. Build other partition images if desired. Click

OK

.

3.

Select the source file for the splash screen (the bitmap created above) on the

File Open

window.

4.

Specify the output filename for the splash screen on the

Save As

file window.

TCM creates the splash screen HEX file and any other HEX files requested.

NOTE

The MK2200 ignores images larger than 640 x 480, in either dimension, or that are not 8 or

16-bit color. Images smaller than 640 x 480 are centered in the display.

Appendix G

Appendix G

OS Upgrade Procedures

OS Upgrade Procedures

Overview

MK2200 operating system upgrade procedures enable software updates and/or feature enhancements. This appendix provides upgrading instructions using a PC card and the Initial Program Loader (IPL).

To upgrade the MK2200 operating system:

1.

Review

Upgrade Requirements on page G-1

.

2.

Perform

Monitor Upgrade on page G-4

.

3.

Perform

Partition Table Upgrade on page G-6

.

4.

Perfrom

Command File Upgrade on page G-7

.

Upgrade Requirements

Hardware Requirements

PC card with the appropriate upgrade files.

NOTE

Symbol recommends using a freshly formatted PC card for storing the upgrade files. Format the PC card using the FAT file system in the host computer, then copy the upgrade files to the PC card. The upgrade may fail if the PC card contains a corrupt file system.

The PC card uses the same slot as the RF radio card. Removing the RF radio card is not recommended.

ESD mat and equipment required to properly ground the operator.

CAUTION

When removing an access cover, follow proper ESD precautions to avoid damaging sensitive components. These include, but are not limited to, working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the operator is properly grounded. Failure to apply proper ESD precautions can damage the MK2200 and void the warranty.

NOTE

The MK Series includes two different platforms and operating files based on operating systems for the MK2200 (wired) versus the MK2250 (RF).

G - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Software Requirements

The files required to upgrade the MK2200 include:

Command file for the MK2200:

-

PC_MK2000_XXX.mcf

Command file for the MK2250:

-

PC_MK2046_XXX.mcf

The following partition files:

-

Monitor file: 20xxc42Monxxxxxxxx.bgz

-

OS file: 20xxc42OSxxxxxx.bgz

-

Platform file: 20xxc42Plat64Mxxx.hex

-

Partition Table file: 20xxc42Pt64Mxxx.hex

-

Splash Screen file: 20xxc42cSplxxx.hex

Procedural Requirements

Monitor Upgrade on page G-4

Partition Table Upgrade on page G-6

Command File Upgrade on page G-7

Appendix G: OS Upgrade Procedures G - 3

IPL Menu Navigation

IPL is a menu-based method of downloading partitions to non-volatile storage (flash) on the MK2200. You can download the following partitions:

OS Partition

Platform Partition

Application Partition

Partition Table

Splash Screen

Monitor.

Use the MK2200 buttons to navigate IPL menus and make selections. The buttons and their functions are

shown in

Figure G-1

.

A

Button

Scroll Down

B

Button

Scroll Up

Figure G-1

Button Functions

C

Button

Select Menu Option

G - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

OS Upgrade

To upgrade the MK2200 operating system using a PC card, see the following sections to perform monitor, partition table, and command file upgrades.

To begin the operating system upgrade:

1.

Power off the MK2200.

2.

Remove the PCMCIA access cover (see

Figure 1-2 on page 1-4

).

3.

Insert the PC card into the PC card slot.

Monitor Upgrade

NOTE

A failure during the monitor upgrade can cause the MK2200 to become inoperable.

To perform a monitor upgrade:

1.

Enter IPL mode by powering on the MK2200 while holding the

A

button. The

Initial Program Loader

main menu displays.

Initial Program Loader

Timer off

Platform

Application

Windows CE

Monitor

Splash Screen

Partition Table

Command File

System Reset

Auto Select

Figure G-2

IPL Main Menu

2.

From the

Initial Program Loader

main menu, press the

A

or

B

button to highlight

Monitor

.

3.

Press the

C

button to select

Monitor

. The

Select Transport

menu displays.

Select Transport

Timer off

PC Card

CF Card

Scanner/Printer - Serial

RS 485 - Serial

Previous

Top

Figure G-3

Select Transport Menu

Appendix G: OS Upgrade Procedures G - 5

4.

Press the

A

or

B

button to select the file media source and highlight

PC Card

.

5.

Press the

C

button to select

PC Card

. The

Select File Name

menu displays.

Select File Name

Timer off

20xxc42Monxxxxxxxx.bgz

20xxc42OSxxxxxx.bgz

20xxc42Plat64Mxxx.hex

20xxc42Pt64Mxxx.hex

20xxc42App64Mxxx.hex

20xxc42cSplxxx.hex

Previous

Top

Figure G-4

Select File Name Menu

6.

Press the

A

or

B

button to highlight the monitor upgrade file,

20xxc42Monxxxxxxxx.bgz

.

7.

Press the

C

button to select

20xxc42Monxxxxxxxx.bgz

. The

Download File?

menu displays.

Download File?

Timer off

Download

Cancel

Show Parms

Previous

Top

Figure G-5

Download File? Menu

8.

Press the

A

or

B

button to highlight

Download

.

9.

Press the

C

button to initiate the monitor file download.

When the monitor upgrade begins, the following message displays.

Downloading:

Monitor

Via PC Card 20xxc42Monxxxxxxxx.bgz

############# 100%Your terminal needs to be rebooted.

Please press button A to reboot.

Figure G-6

Monitor Upgrade, Downloading Message

NOTE

I

f an error occurs, remove power from the MK2200 and restore power to reboot the

MK2200. Hold the

A

button during the reboot. The IPL main menu displays. Repeat the Monitor upgrade procedure.

10.

When the new monitor is successfully loaded, the MK2200 prompts to press a button, then reboots.

G - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

11.

Continue the OS upgrade by holding the

A

button during the reboot to display the

IPL

main menu.

12.

Proceed to

Partition Table Upgrade on page G-6

.

Partition Table Upgrade

To perform a partition table upgrade:

1.

From the

IPL

main menu, press the

A

or

B

button to highlight

Partition Table

.

2.

Press the

C

button to select

Partition Table

. The

Select Transport

menu displays.

Select Transport

Timer off

PC Card

CF Card

Scanner/Printer - Serial

RS 485 - Serial

Previous

Top

Figure G-7

Select Transport Menu

3.

Select the file media source by pressing the

A

or

B

button to highlight

PC Card

.

4.

Press the

C

button to select

PC Card

. The

Select File Name

menu displays.

Select File Name

Timer off

20xxc42Monxxxxxxxx.bgz

20xxc42OSxxxxxx.bgz

20xxc42Plat64Mxxx.hex

20xxc42Pt64Mxxx.hex

20xxc42App64Mxxx.hex

20xxc42cSplxxx.hex

Previous

Top

Figure G-8

Select File Name Menu

5.

Press the

A

or

B

button to highlight the partition table upgrade file,

20xxc42Pt64Mxxx.hex

.

Appendix G: OS Upgrade Procedures G - 7

6.

Press the

C

button to select

20xxc42Pt64Mxxx.hex

. The

Download File?

menu displays.

Download File?

Timer off

Download

Cancel

Show Parms

Previous

Top

Figure G-9

Download File? Menu

7.

Press the

A

or

B

button to highlight

Download

.

8.

Press the

C

button to select

Download

and initiate the partition table upgrade. When the partition table upgrade begins, the following

Downloading

message displays.

Downloading:

Partition Table

Via PC Card 20xxc42Pt64Mxxx.hex

Result was Success!

Please press Enter to continue

Figure G-10

Partition Table Upgrade, Downloading Message

NOTE

If an error screen displays, remove power from the MK2200 and restore power to reboot the device. Hold the A button during the reboot. The IPL main menu displays. Repeat the Partition

Table upgrade procedure.

9.

When the message

Please press Enter to continue

displays, press the

C

button to continue the OS upgrade

and proceed to

Command File Upgrade

.

Command File Upgrade

To perform a command file upgrade:

1.

From the

IPL

main menu, press the

A

or

B

button to highlight

Command File

.

2.

Press the

C

button to select

Command File

. The

Select Transport

menu displays.

Select Transport

Timer off

PC Card

CF Card

Scanner/Printer - Serial

RS 485 - Serial

Previous

Top

Figure G-11

Select Transport Menu

G - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

3.

Select the file media source by pressing the

A

or

B

button to highlight

PC Card

.

4.

Press the

C

button to select

PC Card

. The

Select File Name

menu displays.

Select File Name

Timer off

PC_MK2000_XXX.mcf

PC_MK2046_XXX.mcf

Previous

Top

Figure G-12

Select File Name Menu

5.

Select the command file by pressing the

A

or

B

button to highlight the appropriate file to download.

NOTE

If the mon> error message displays, remove power from the MK2200 and restore power to reboot the device. Hold the

A

button during the reboot. The IPL main menu displays. Repeat the

Command File upgrade procedure.

6.

Press the

C

button to select the file. The

Download File?

menu displays.

Download File?

Timer off

Download

Cancel

Show Parms

Previous

Top

Figure G-13

Download File? Menu

7.

Press the

A

or

B

button to highlight

Download

.

8.

Press the

C

button to select

Download

and initiate the command file upgrade. When the partition table upgrade begins, the following

Downloading

message displays.

Downloading:

Partition Table

Via PC Card 20xxc42Pt64Mxxx.hex

Result was Success!

Please press Enter to continue

Figure G-14

Partition Table Upgrade, Downloading Message

Appendix G: OS Upgrade Procedures G - 9

9.

When the command file upgrade begins, the following message displays.

Downloading:

Command File

Via PC Card CF_MK2000_XXX.mcf

Obtaining script file from given transport . . .

################### 100%

Begin script execution

-----------------------------------------------------------

Partition Table

################### 100%

Download complete in 0.656 seconds

(12487 bytes/second)

----------------------------------------------------------------

Splash Screen

################### 100%

Download complete in 3.257 seconds

(94131 bytes/second)

----------------------------------------------------------------

Platform

################### 100%

Download complete in 14.337 seconds

(365000 bytes/second)

----------------------------------------------------------------

Application

################### 100%

Download complete in 39.38 seconds

(718000 bytes/second)

----------------------------------------------------------------

################### 100%Your terminal needs to be rebooted.

Please press button A to reboot.

Figure G-15

Command File Upgrade, Downloading Message

NOTE

If an error screen displays, remove power from the MK2200 and restore power to reboot the device. Hold the

A

button during the reboot. The IPL main menu displays. Repeat the

Command File upgrade procedure.

10.

Press and release button

A

to perform a warm boot. When the desktop displays, remove power from the

MK2200. Remove the PC card and replace the PC access cover (see

Figure 1-2 on page 1-4

).

G - 10 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Calibrating the Screen

Use the

Calibration

screen to align the touch screen:

1.

Remove and restore power to the MK2200 to reboot.

2.

From the

Windows CE Desktop

window, press buttons

A

,

C

, and

D

simultaneously to display the

Calibration

screen.

Figure G-16

Calibration Screen

NOTE

To access the Calibration screen from the Windows CE Control Panel, tap Start >

Settings > Control Panel. Double-tap the Stylus icon, tap the Calibration tab, and tap the

Recalibrate button. The Calibration screen displays.

3.

Carefully press and briefly hold the stylus tip on the center of the

Calibration

screen target. Repeat the procedure as the target moves and stops at different locations on the screen.

4.

The

Confirm Calibration Resave

screen displays. Press the left two buttons (

A

and

B

) to accept the new settings or press the right two buttons (

C

and

D

) to retain the existing calibration settings.

Figure G-17

Save Settings, Calibration Screen

Appendix G: OS Upgrade Procedures G - 11

Update Corona Scanner Engine Firmware

Unzip ScanflashVX.X_CE4.x.zip file and copy its contents to the root "\" directory on the MK2200 device. The zip file contains:

Corona scanner firmware binary image file (*.FDL)

ScanFlash.exe

ScanFlash.bat.

Execute the ScanFlash.bat file to update the Corona Scanner Engine firmware.

NOTE

Do not disrupt power to the MK2200 while updating scanner engine firmware. Doing so can damage the scanner engine.

G - 12 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Appendix H

Appendix H

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Overview

The MK2200 troubleshooting is provided in three sections:

Troubleshooting on page H-2

offers troubleshooting scenarios for the MK2200.

OS Upgrade Troubleshooting on page H-5

provides OS upgrade troubleshooting scenarios for the

MK2200.

MK2200 Version Information on page H-6

describes how to identify the MK2200 version.

Troubleshooting Notes

When configuring the MK2200 System Menu screens, save and reboot the MK2200 to apply the changes. To save some Control Panel changes across cold boot cycles, on the MK2200, select

Start > Programs > Save

Configuration

(see

Control Panel Configuration Parameters on page 3-24

).

Troubleshooting

MK2200 does not turn on on page H-2

MK2200 appears to lock up upon bootup on page H-2

MK2200 does not respond to polls from the host computer on page H-2

MK2200 does not send data to host computer on page H-3

Web Kiosk Software Suite does not work after making changes to the MK2200 on page H-3

Scanner does not recognize configuration bar codes on page H-3

Parameter changes made using System Menu were not retained after the MK2200 was re-booted on page H-3

Reg file values are not copied into the Registry at boot time on page H-3

The screen does not respond to pen input on page H-3

AirBeam fails to start; abstart.exe crashed at boot up on page H-3

Need to determine a device MAC address on page H-3

The wireless MK2200 does not retain its WEP Key encryption after a reboot on page H-4

The Mobile Companion icon does not appear in the task tray on page H-4

H - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

When downloading files to the MK2200 from a .zip file using ActiveSync, a message displays indicating there is not enough free disk space to copy the application on page H-4

When downloading a large file over ethernet, IE issues an insufficient memory message on page H-4

When upgrading using a PC card, the MK2200 cannot find files on the PC card on page H-4

Flash file system is corrupt on page H-5

Copying large amount of files from PC card to the application folder fails with error "Access is denied" on page H-5

Table H-1

Troubleshooting

Problem

MK2200 does not turn on

MK2200 appears to lock up upon bootup

MK2200 does not respond to polls from the host computer

Possible Causes

No power to the

MK2200.

Possible Solutions

Power through AC outlet

Connect the Symbol approved power supply to an AC power source and to the MK2200 power

connector. See

Figure 1-3 on page

1-5

.

Power through power-over-Ethernet

Connect 8-wire Ethernet cable to

MK2200 LAN port.

Connect other end of Ethernet cable to Bias-T

Power-Over-Ethernet (POE).

Connect Bias-T POE power supply to an AC outlet.

Perform continuity check on the

Ethernet cable.

A utility with no user interface was specified as the first user application, or user application failed to run.

Either specify no user application, or a

UI-based application as the first user application. If no user application is specified, Explorer.exe is used.

Note: this is a substitution of

Explorer.exe as the user application, not protected mode.

No communication between the host and

MK2200.

Check cables to the MK2200. Ensure the MK2200 address is the address the host is polling.

Check communication parameters.

Open a command window using

Start > Programs > Command

and type

ipconfig

to list the status of all radio and ethernet interfaces.

Appendix H: Troubleshooting H - 3

Table H-1

Troubleshooting (Continued)

Problem Possible Causes

MK2200 does not send data to host computer

MK2200 is not programmed to work with the host.

Possible Solutions

Check setup communication parameters.

MK2200 is not connected to the host.

Check cables to host computer.

Web Kiosk Software Suite does not work after making changes to the MK2200

Scanner does not recognize configuration bar codes

Web Kiosk Software

Suite parameter settings inconsistent with latest program changes and/or corrupt files.

Locate and delete the files associated with the Web Kiosk Software Suite (in the My Computer/Application folder).

Then reload the files associated with the Web Kiosk Software Suite. See

Installing the Web Kiosk Software

Suite on page 6-2

.

The scan driver does not support parameter bar code scanning.

Configure the scanner using scanning

C API or Active X scanner object.

Parameter changes made using System Menu were not retained after the MK2200 was re-booted

Reg file values are not copied into the Registry at boot time

Parameter changes were not saved.

More than one .reg file and duplicate registry entries are present.

See

Setting Defaults Using the

System Menu on page 3-5

.

Review all .reg files in /Application and

/Platform and ensure they have no conflicts.

The screen does not respond to pen input

AirBeam fails to start; abstart.exe crashed at boot up

Need to determine a device

MAC address

The screen is not properly calibrated, or is off center.

See

Stylus Settings/Touch Screen

Calibration on page 3-28

System Menu or RDM is used to enable

DHCP receive options.

Do not use the System Menu or RDM to enable DHCP receive options 1, 3,

6, 15, 44, 46, 47, 66, and 67. They are already enabled in dhcpoptions.reg as a part of the AirBeam package. Refer to AirBeam documentation for this configuration.

N/A Open

Start > Programs >

CommandPrompt

. Type ipconfig /all to display the MAC address next to

‘address’.

H - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table H-1

Troubleshooting (Continued)

Problem

The wireless MK2200 does not retain its WEP Key encryption after a reboot

Possible Causes

Encryption keys not saved in Aegis.reg or

Spectrum24.reg.

The Mobile Companion icon does not appear in the task tray

Poor RF card connection or bad RF card.

Remove the PCMCIA card cover (see

Installing/Removing the RF Card on page 2-21

). Press the card ejector

button to release the card, then press the card back into its connector to secure it in place.

Reboot the MK2200. If the Mobile

Companion icon still does not appear in the task tray, replace the RF card.

Verify presence of radio software or re-install \Platform partition software.

The radio software is not present in the

\platform folder.

When downloading files to the

MK2200 from a .zip file using

ActiveSync, a message displays indicating there is not enough free disk space to copy the application

Files cannot download directly from a .zip file.

Extract/unzip the files to the host computer, then transfer the unzipped files to the MK2200 using ActiveSync.

When downloading a large file over ethernet, IE issues an insufficient memory message

For some file types, IE requires free RAM equivalent to twice the file's size.

This is an IE limitation.

When upgrading using a PC card, the MK2200 cannot find files on the PC card

Possible Solutions

Set encryption keys using Mobile

Companion, then select

Start > Tools >

Save Spectrum24

or

Start > Tools >

Save Aegis Settings

to save them to

Aegis.reg / Spectrum24.reg.

Check communication parameter settings.

Open a command window using

Start

> Programs > Command

and type

ipconfig

to list the status of all radio and ethernet interfaces.

The PC card is not formatted properly for the MK2200.

Format the PC card as FAT16.

Appendix H: Troubleshooting H - 5

Table H-1

Troubleshooting (Continued)

Problem

Flash file system is corrupt

Possible Causes

Reset or power loss during write to file system.

Copying large amount of files from PC card to the application folder fails with error "Access is denied"

Archive bit of the folder properties set.

When using SaveConfig to save settings and cycling power before the Save

Complete message appears, the device does not boot properly.

Similarly, when using ActiveX or C API to save configurations, the device does not boot properly.

Corrupt mkconfig.reg file.

Possible Solutions

Format file system partition using

Start

> Settings > Control Panel > Storage

Manager

, and re-install partition data.

Clear the archive bit of folder properties.

Use ActiveSync to delete the existing mkconfig.reg file or use Monitor to repartition the Application partition.

If problems still occur, see

MK2200 Version Information on page H-6

for system information before calling for

service help.

OS Upgrade Troubleshooting

Monitor Upgrade Troubleshooting on page H-5

.

Partition Table Upgrade Troubleshooting on page H-6

Command File Upgrade Troubleshooting on page H-6

NOTE

If OS upgrading repeatedly fails when using a PC card, use the Fat-16 system to format the

PC card before saving the upgrade files.

Table H-2

OS Upgrade Troubleshooting

Problem

Monitor Upgrade Troubleshooting

Possible Causes

Downloading Message, error screen

Monitor upgrade error.

MK2200 does not boot after performing a monitor update

Monitor upgrade failure.

Possible Solutions

Remove power from the MK2200, and restore power to reboot the MK2200.

Hold the

A

button during the reboot.

The IPL main menu displays. Repeat the monitor upgrade procedure.

Failures during the monitor upgrade often render the MK2200 inoperable. If the MK2200 does not boot after performing a monitor update, contact

Symbol Support.

H - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table H-2

OS Upgrade Troubleshooting (Continued)

Problem Possible Causes

Partition Table Upgrade Troubleshooting

Downloading Message, error screen

Partition table upgrade error.

Data Abort Exception Error Partition table upgrade error.

Possible Solutions

Remove power from the MK2200, and restore power to reboot the MK2200.

Hold the

A

button during the reboot.

The IPL main menu displays. Repeat the partition table upgrade procedure.

Remove power from the MK2200, and restore power to reboot the MK2200.

Hold the

A

button during the reboot.

The IPL main menu displays. Repeat the partition table upgrade procedure.

Command File Upgrade Troubleshooting

The

mon>

error message displays

Command file upgrade error.

Remove power from the MK2200, and restore power to reboot the MK2200.

Hold the

A

button during the reboot.

The IPL main menu displays. Repeat the partition table upgrade procedure.

MK2200 Version Information

If an MK2200 is configured to launch an application on power-up, bypass this upon booting to access the

Windows

®

CE Desktop. See

Accessing the Windows® CE Desktop on page 8-7

.

1.

From the Windows

®

task bar, select

Start > Settings > Control Panel

.

2.

Select

MK2200

identification from the Control Panel window to view the following information:

-

Device name

-

Description

-

OS version

-

Monitor version

-

Display type

-

Memory sizes.

The Remote Device Manager (RDM) provides more detailed version information. See

Monitoring MK2200s on a Network on page 4-16

.

Appendix I

Appendix I

Setting Scanner Parameters

Setting Scanner Parameters

Overview

This chapter describes the scanning default parameters for the MK2200, useful when developing applications that control the MK2200 scan engine.

Enabling and Disabling Symbologies

See the following for information on where to find programming examples for enabling and disabling symbologies.

C API

Refer to the file

scan.c

in Samples\ EVC\Standard\Common in the SMDK for eVC4. See the functions

ScanEnableDecoder

and

ScanDisableDecoder

, which enable and disable a single symbology using the scanner C API functions.

ActiveX API (Browser Applications)

Refer to the file scanframe.html in the Web Kiosk Software Suite. See the subroutine

SetLaserMode

which enables and disables symbologies based on whether 2D scanning is enabled.

Default Table

Table I-1

lists the default values for the MK2200 SE 3223 Scan Engine. If desired, change these values within an application, and in the case of HTML (browser) applications, set them independently for each web page.

To change the settings in an application, refer to the

MK2000 SMDK for C

. See the

scanparams

sample application in the SMDK.

For a sample HTML application that includes source code and demonstrates scan engine control, see

Chapter

6, Web Kiosk Software Suite

.

I - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table I-1

Scanning Default Table

Parameter

Scanning Options

Beeper Tone

Laser On Time

Power Mode

Trigger Mode

Scanning Mode

Aiming Mode

Raster Height

Raster Expansion Rate

Time Delay to Low Power

Time-out Between Same Symbol

Time-out Between Different Symbols

Beep After Good Decode

Transmit “No Decode” Message

Parameter Scanning

Linear Code Type Security Levels

Bi-directional Redundancy

UPC/EAN

UPC-A

UPC-E

UPC-E1

EAN-8

EAN-13

Bookland EAN

Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals

Decode UPC/EAN Supplemental

Redundancy

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

Parameter

Number

5Eh

ECh

4Eh

43h

92h

89h

90h

38h

91h

88h

80h

8Ah

8Dh

F0h 7Eh

E4h

E5h

03h

53h

10h

50h

01h

02h

0Ch

04h

28h

29h

Enable

Enable

Disable

Enable

Enable

Disable

Ignore

5

Enable

Disable

Default

30 sec

0.9 sec

0.0 sec

Enable

Disable

Disable

2

Disable

High Frequency

5.0 sec

Continuous

Host

Smart Raster

Disabled

100

11

Appendix I: Setting Scanner Parameters I - 3

Table I-1

Scanning Default Table (Continued)

Parameter

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

UPC-A Preamble

UPC-E Preamble

UPC-E1 Preamble

Convert UPC-E to A

Convert UPC-E1 to A

EAN-8 Zero Extend

UPC/EAN Security Level

Linear UPC/EAN Decode

UPC Half Block Stitching

UPC Composite Mode

Code 128

Code 128

UCC/EAN-128

ISBT 128

Code 128 Decode Performance

Code 128 Decode Performance Level

Code 39

Code 39

Trioptic Code 39

Convert Code 39 to Code 32

Code 32 Prefix

Set Length(s) for Code 39

23h

24h

25h

26h

Parameter

Number

2Ah

22h

27h

4Dh

44h

4Ah

F0h 58h

08h

0Eh

54h

48h

49h

Code 39 Check Digit Verification

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion

Code 39 Decode Performance

Code 39 Decode Performance Level

30h

2Bh

11h

46h

47h

00h

0Dh

56h

E7h

12h

13h

Default

Disable

System Character

No Preamble

No Preamble

Disable

Disable

Disable

0

Enable

Disable

Never Linked

Enable

Enable

Enable

Enable

Level 1

Enable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Length within Range: 0-55

Disable

Disable

Disable

Enable

Level 1

I - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table I-1

Scanning Default Table (Continued)

Code 93

Code 93

Parameter

Set Length(s) for Code 93

Parameter

Number

09h

1Ah

1Bh

Interleaved 2 of 5

Interleaved 2 of 5

Set Length(s) for I 2 of 5

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13

Discrete 2 of 5

Discrete 2 of 5

Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5

05h

14h

15h

Codabar

Codabar

Set Lengths for Codabar

CLSI Editing

NOTIS Editing

MSI Plessey

MSI Plessey

Set Length(s) for MSI Plessey

MSI Plessey Check Digits

Transmit MSI Plessey Check Digit

MSI Plessey Check Digit Algorithm

PDF417/MicroPDF417

PDF417 0fh

MicroPDF417 E3h

0Bh

1Eh

1Fh

32h

2Eh

33h

07h

18h

19h

36h

37h

06h

16h

17h

31h

2Ch

52h

Disable

Length within Range: 0-55

Disable

1 Discrete Length: 14

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

1 Discrete Length: 14

Enable

Default

Length within Range:

06-55

Disable

Disable

Enable

Length Within Range: 04 -

55

One

Disable

Mod 11/Mod 10

Enable

Enable

Appendix I: Setting Scanner Parameters I - 5

Table I-1

Scanning Default Table (Continued)

Parameter

Code 128 Emulation

RSS

RSS-14

RSS Limited

RSS Expanded

Data Options

Transmit Code ID Character

Prefix/Suffix Values

Prefix

Suffix 1

Suffix 2

Scan Data Transmission Format

Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Options

Baud Rate

Parity

Check Parity

Software Handshaking

Decode Data Packet Format

Stop Bit Select

Intercharacter Delay

Host Serial Response Time-out

Host Character Time-out

Event Reporting

Decode Event

Boot Up Event

Parameter Event

Macro PDF

Transmit Each Symbol in

Codeword Format

Transmit Unknown Codewords

Escape Character

Parameter

Number

7Bh

FOh 52h

FOh 52h

FOh 52h

2Dh

69h

68h

6Ah

EBh

9Ch

9Eh

97h

9Fh

EEh

9Dh

6Eh

9Bh

EFh

F0h 00h

F0h 02h

F0h 03h

Afh

BAh

E9h

Disable

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

None

NULL

CR

LF

Data as is

38400

None

Enable

ACK/NAK

Packeted

1

0

2 sec

200 msec

Enable

Enable

Enable

Disable

Disable

None

Default

I - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Table I-1

Scanning Default Table (Continued)

Parameter

ECI

Delete Character Set ECIs

ECI Decoder

Transmit Macro PDF User-Selected Field

Transmit File Name

Transmit Block Count

Transmit Time Stamp

Transmit Sender

Transmit Addressee

Transmit Checksum

Transmit File Size

Transmit Macro PDF Control Header

Last Block Marker

Parameter

Number

E6h

E8h

B4h

B6h

B5h

B7h

B9h

B0h

B1h

B2h

B3h

Enable

Enable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Disable

Default

Set Default Parameters

Scanning the below bar code sets the scan engine to the default settings listed in

Table I-1

. After scanning this bar code, reboot the MK2200 to apply the settings.

Glossary

ACK/NAK.

AirBeam Manager.

Aperture.

ANSI Terminal.

ASCII.

Autodiscrimination.

Bar.

Bar Code Density.

Bar Height.

Bar Width.

ACK/NAK is the default software handshaking.

AirBeam Manager is a comprehensive wireless network management system that provides essential functions that are required to configure, monitor, upgrade and troubleshoot the Spectrum24

® wireless network and its components

(including networked terminals). Some features include event notification, access point configuration, diagnostics, statistical reports, auto-discovery, wireless proxy agents and monitoring of access points and mobile devices.

The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes the field of view.

A display terminal that follows commands in the ANSI standard terminal language.

For example, it uses escape sequences to control the cursor, clear the screen and set colors. Communications programs support the ANSI terminal mode and often default to this terminal emulation for dial-up connections to online services.

American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7 bit-plus-parity code representing 128 letters, numerals, punctuation marks and control characters.

It is a standard data transmission code in the U.S.

The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned bar code. After this determination is made, the information content is decoded.

The dark element in a printed bar code symbol.

The number of characters represented per unit of measurement

(e.g., characters per inch).

The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width.

Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same bar.

Glossary - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Baud Rate.

Bit.

Byte.

BOOTP.

A measure of the data flow or number of signaling events occurring per second.

When one bit is the standard "event," this is a measure of bits per second

(bps). For example, a baud rate of 50 means transmission of 50 bits of data per second.

Binary digit. One bit is the basic unit of binary information. Generally, eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data. The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning.

On an addressable boundary, eight adjacent binary digits (0 and 1) combined in a pattern to represent a specific character or numeric value. Bits are numbered from the right, 0 through 7, with bit 0 the low-order bit. One byte in memory is used to store one ASCII character.

A protocol for remote booting of diskless devices. Assigns an IP address to a machine and may specify a boot file. The client sends a bootp request as a broadcast to the bootp server port (67) and the bootp server responds using the bootp client port (68). The bootp server must have a table of all devices, associated MAC addresses and IP addresses.

CDRH.

CDRH Class 1.

Center for Devices and Radiological Health. A federal agency responsible for regulating laser product safety. This agency specifies various laser operation classes based on power output during operation.

This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification. This class is considered intrinsically safe, even if all laser output were directed into the eye's pupil.

There are no special operating procedures for this class.

CDRH Class 2.

Character.

No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit. Laser operation in this class poses no danger for unintentional direct human exposure.

A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly represents data or indicates a control function, such as a number, letter, punctuation mark, or communications control contained in a message.

Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology.

Character Set.

Check Digit.

Codabar.

Code 128.

A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode. The scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula and checks that the resulting number matches the encoded check digit. Check digits are required for UPC but are optional for other symbologies. Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol is decoded.

A discrete self-checking code with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional characters: ( - $ : / , +).

A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements.

Code 3 of 9 (Code 39).

A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43 character types, including all uppercase letters, numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special characters (- . / + % $ and space). The code name is derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide, while the remaining

6 are narrow.

Glossary - 3

Code 93.

Code Length.

Continuous Code.

Dead Zone.

Decode.

Decode Algorithm.

Decryption.

Depth of Field.

DHCP.

DHCP Server.

Discrete Code.

Discrete 2 of 5.

EAN.

Element.

Encoded Area.

ENQ (RS-232).

An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding density than Code 39.

Number of data characters in a bar code between the start and stop characters, not including those characters.

A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of characters.

There are no intercharacter gaps in a continuous code. The absence of gaps allows for greater information density.

An area within a scanner's field of view, in which specular reflection may prevent a successful decode.

To recognize a bar code symbology (e.g., UPC/EAN) and then analyze the content of the specific bar code scanned.

A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data representation of the letters or numbers encoded within a bar code symbol.

Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data. Also see,

Encryption and Key.

The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain minimum element width.

(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Software that automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP/IP network. Similar to BOOTP, but also permits the leasing of an IP address. It eliminates having to manually assign permanent IP addresses. DHCP software typically runs in servers and is also found in network devices such as routers that allow multiple users access to the Internet.

A server in the network or a service within a server that assigns IP addresses.

A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters (intercharacter gaps) are not part of the code.

A binary bar code symbology representing each character by a group of five bars, two of which are wide. The location of wide bars in the group determines which character is encoded; spaces are insignificant. Only numeric characters (0 to

9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.

European Article Number. This European/International version of the UPC provides its own coding format and symbology standards. Element dimensions are specified metrically. EAN is used primarily in retail.

Generic term for a bar or space.

Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern, including start/stop characters and data.

ENQ software handshaking is also supported for the data sent to the host.

Glossary - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Encryption.

ESD.

ESS_ID.

Encryption is the scrambling and coding of data, typically using mathematical formulas called algorithms, before information is transmitted over any communications link or network. A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data. Also see, Decryption and Key.

Electro-Static Discharge

Extended Service Set Identifier, defines the coverage area. Prior to the release of the 802.11 specification the ESS_ID was called the Net_ID or Network

Identifier.

Flash Memory.

Host Computer.

IEC.

ESS_ID: 32 Alphanumeric characters, (case sensitive).

Flash memory is responsible for storing the system firmware and is non-volatile. If the system power is interrupted the data will not be lost.

A computer that serves other terminals in a network, providing such services as computation, database access, supervisory programs and network control.

International Electrotechnical Commission. This international agency regulates laser safety by specifying various laser operation classes based on power output during operation.

IEC (825) Class 1.

IEEE Address.

Intercharacter Gap.

This is the lowest power IEC laser classification. Conformity is ensured through a software restriction of 120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second window and an automatic laser shutdown if the scanner's oscillating mirror fails.

See

MAC Address

.

The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code.

Interleaved Bar Code.

A bar code in which characters are paired together, using bars to represent the first character and the intervening spaces to represent the second.

Interleaved 2 of 5.

A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces. Interleaving provides for greater information density. The location of wide elements (bar/spaces) within each group determines which characters are encoded. This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces. Only numeric (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.

IP.

(Internet Protocol) The IP part of the TCP/IP communications protocol. IP implements the network layer (layer 3) of the protocol, which contains a network address and is used to route a message to a different network or subnetwork. IP accepts “packets” from the layer 4 transport protocol (TCP or

UDP), adds its own header to it and delivers a “datagram” to the layer 2 data link protocol. It may also break the packet into fragments to support the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of the network.

Glossary - 5

IP Address.

Kerberos.

Key.

(Internet Protocol address) The address of a computer attached to an IP network.

Every client and server station must have a unique IP address. A 32-bit address used by a computer on a IP network. Client workstations have either a permanent address or one that is dynamically assigned to them each session. IP addresses are written as four sets of numbers separated by periods; for example, 204.171.64.2.

Kerberos is a network authentication protocol. It is designed to provide strong authentication for client/server applications by using secret-key cryptography.

A free implementation of this protocol is available from the Massachusetts

Institute of Technology. Kerberos is available in many commercial products as well.

A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data. Also see, Encryption and Decrypting.

The laser is an intense light source. Light from a laser is all the same frequency, unlike the output of an incandescent bulb. Laser light is typically coherent and has a high energy density.

LASER

-

Light

Amplification by

Stimulated Emission of Radiation.

Laser Diode.

LED Indicator.

MAC Address

(also called IEEE

Address).

Nominal Size.

Open System

Authentication.

A gallium-arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source to generate a laser beam. This laser type is a compact source of coherent light.

A semiconductor diode (LED - Light Emitting Diode) used as an indicator, often in digital displays. The semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor's particular chemical composition.

Spectrum24

® devices, like other Ethernet devices, have unique, hardware-encoded MAC (also called IEEE addresses). MAC addresses determine the device sending or receiving data. The MAC address is a 48-bit number written as six hexadecimal bytes separated by colons.

MIL.

MU.

1 mil = 1 thousandth of an inch.

Misread (Misdecode).

A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface controller does not agree with the data encoded within a bar code symbol.

The MU (Mobile Unit) searches for APs with the same ESS_ID and associates with an AP to establish communications.

Null Modem Cable.

An RS-232 cable used to connect two personal computers together in close proximity for file transfer. It attaches to the serial ports of both machines and simulates what would occur naturally if modems and the phone system were used. It crosses the sending wire with the receiving wire.

Nominal.

The exact (or ideal) intended value for a specified parameter. Tolerances are specified as positive and negative deviations from this value.

Standard size for a bar code symbol. Most UPC/EAN codes are used over a range of magnifications (e.g., from 0.80 to 2.00 of nominal).

Open System authentication is a null authentication algorithm.

Glossary - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Parameter.

Percent Decode.

PING.

Print Contrast Signal

(PCS).

Programming Mode.

Protected Mode.

Quiet Zone.

Reflectance.

Resolution.

Scan Area.

Scanner.

A variable that can have different values assigned to it.

The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a successful decode. In a well-designed bar code scanning system, that probability should approach near 100%.

(Packet Internet Groper) An Internet utility used to determine whether a particular

IP address is online. It is used to test and debug a network by sending out a packet and waiting for a response.

Measurement of the contrast (brightness difference) between the bars and spaces of a symbol. A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable. PCS = (RL - RD) / RL, where RL is the reflectance factor of the background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars.

The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values. See SCANNING

MODE.

An application can be assigned password protection so that it can only run when a password is entered. The password can be assigned for a specific application using the RDM, System Menu or the Control Panel.

A clear space, containing no dark marks, which precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and follows the stop character.

Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface.

The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular reading device or printed with a particular device or method.

Area intended to contain a symbol.

An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars and spaces of the symbol. Its three main components are:

1. Light source (laser or photoelectric cell) - illuminates a bar code.

2. Photodetector - registers the difference in reflected light (more light reflected from spaces).

3. Signal conditioning circuit - transforms optical detector output into a digitized bar pattern.

The scanner is energized, programmed and ready to read a bar code.

Scanning Mode.

Scanning Sequence.

A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading system by scanning bar code menus.

SMDK.

Self-Checking Code.

Symbol Mobility Developer Kit

A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within the characters of a bar code symbol.

Shared Key.

Shared Key authentication is an algorithm where both the AP and the MU share an authentication key.

Glossary - 7

Space.

Specular Reflection.

The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars.

The mirror-like direct reflection of light from a surface, which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code.

Start/Stop Character.

A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions and scanning direction. The start and stop characters are normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code.

Subnet Mask.

A 32-bit number used to separate the network and host sections of an IP address.

A custom subnet mask subdivides an IP network into smaller subsections. The mask is a binary pattern that is matched up with the IP address to turn part of the host ID address field into a field for subnets. Default is often 255.255.255.0.

Substrate.

Symbol.

A foundation material on which a substance or image is placed.

A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions of a certain symbology, usually including start/stop characters, quiet zones, data characters and check characters.

Symbol Aspect Ratio.

The ratio of symbol height to symbol width.

Symbol Height.

The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones of the first row and the last row.

Symbol Length.

Symbology.

Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to the start character to the end of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to a stop character.

The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular bar code type (e.g. UPC/EAN, Code 39).

TCP/IP.

(Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) A communications protocol used to internetwork dissimilar systems. This standard is the protocol of the Internet and has become the global standard for communications.

Telnet.

TCP provides transport functions, which ensures that the total amount of bytes sent is received correctly at the other end. UDP is an alternate transport that does not guarantee delivery. It is widely used for real-time voice and video transmissions where erroneous packets are not retransmitted.

IP provides the routing mechanism. TCP/IP is a routable protocol, which means that all messages contain not only the address of the destination station, but the address of a destination network. This allows TCP/IP messages to be sent to multiple networks within an organization or around the world, hence its use in the worldwide Internet. Every client and server in a TCP/IP network requires an IP address, which is either permanently assigned or dynamically assigned at startup.

A terminal emulation protocol commonly used on the Internet and TCP/IP-based networks. It allows a user at a terminal or computer to log onto a remote device and run a program.

Glossary - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

TFTP.

Tolerance.

UDP.

UPC.

(Trivial File Transfer Protocol) A version of the TCP/IP FTP (File Transfer Protocol) protocol that has no directory or password capability. It is the protocol used for upgrading firmware, downloading software and remote booting of diskless devices.

Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width.

(User Datagram Protocol) A protocol within the IP protocol suite that is used in place of TCP when a reliable delivery is not required. For example, UDP is used for real-time audio and video traffic where lost packets are simply ignored, because there is no time to retransmit. If UDP is used and a reliable delivery is required, packet sequence checking and error notification must be written into the applications.

Universal Product Code. A relatively complex numeric symbology. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces, each of which is any of four widths. The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States.

A solid state device which produces visible laser light.

Visible Laser Diode

(VLD).

WEP Encryption.

(Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption) The conversion of data into a secret code for transmission over a public network. The original text, or plaintext, is converted into a coded equivalent called ciphertext using an encryption algorithm. The ciphertext is decoded (decrypted) at the receiving end and turned back into plaintext.

WEP.

WNMP.

The encryption algorithm uses a key, which is a binary number that is typically from

40 to 128 bits in length. The greater the number of bits in the key (cipher strength), the more possible key combinations and the longer it would take to break the code. The data is encrypted, or “locked,” by combining the bits in the key mathematically with the data bits. At the receiving end, the key is used to

“unlock” the code and restore the original data.

Wired Equivalent Privacy, is specified by IEEE for encryption and decryption of RF

(wireless) communications.

(Wireless Network Management Protocol) This is Symbol proprietary MAC layer protocol used for inter access point communication and other MAC layer communication.

WNMS

(has been renamed to AirBeam

Manager).

See AirBeam Manager

Index

A

AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

access cover

accessory bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

accessing the Windows® CE desktop . . . . . . . . 6-2, 8-7

accessories

MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

accessory bay access cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

downloading configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

enabling/disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

advanced printer monitoring functionality . . . . . . . . 3-21

aegis client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

AirBeam

rapid deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

alphanumeric keyboard layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

alternative language support

source code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

antenna location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-21

application default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

application version tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 source code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

applications

configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

attract mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 6-6

automatic device startup

source code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

B

backlight

intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

bar code scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

bar codes

kiosk software suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 7-5

beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

browsers

handling network disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

hiding toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 iesample.exe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 kioskie.exe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

button mappings

disable a button combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 keycode values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

protected mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

buttons

function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

C

C# attract mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

C# customer application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

C# IAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

C# kiosk software suite

bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

slide show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

C# KSS

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

C# KSS attract mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

C# KSS Employee Badge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

C# KSS idle mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

cable pin-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

calibration . . . . . . 3-2, 3-10, 3-24, 3-28, 3-29, 8-8, 8-10,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10, H-3

CD listening station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7, 7-8

chapter descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

cold boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4, 6-2, 8-9

com ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

command file upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-7

communication default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 2-14

Index - 2 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

ethernet, wired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

RS-232, wired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 2-12, 2-14

RS-485, wired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 2-11, 2-14

wired ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 wireless ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

companion programs

Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

WordPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

configuration file

copying to other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12, 4-13

downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 downloading using ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

downloading using remote device manager . . . 4-13

modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 3-20

RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

RS-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

tethered scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 3-21

to host computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

wired ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

country code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

creating splash screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

current time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

customer application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

D

data capture

scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

default gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

default parameters

applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1

system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-2

update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

delay before launch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

desktop image, splash screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

developer kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

PocketBrowser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

SMDK for C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

SMDK for NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

SMDK for the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

device activity manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12, 3-20

DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-14

configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

discovery (detection) of networked devices . . . 4-2, 4-15,

4-20

DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14, B-15

double tap setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

download

configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1, G-5, G-7, G-8

website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 6-2, 6-3

E

electronic serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Electro-Static Discharge, see ESD

enabling symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1

error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8

ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4, 2-18, 2-21, G-1

ESSID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4, B-20

ethernet setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 2-8

Bias-T port connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 2-8

wired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

expansion slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

expansion slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4, 2-18, 2-21

external ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

F

file explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2

flash memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

font loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

FTP security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23, 4-14

FTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

anonymous access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23, 4-14 password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

registry parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

G

gate keeper (password protection) . . . . . . . . . . 3-27, 8-7

gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-15

generating configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

H

headphones jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

hiding browser toolbars

source code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

hiding the WinCE start bar

Index - 3

source code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

host communications

activesync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

ethernet, wired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

RS-232, wired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

RS-485, wired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

I

IAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6, 8-12

idle mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

IE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

inactivity application manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

inactivity manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Initial Program Loader . . . . .8-3, F-1, F-7, G-1, G-3, G-4,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5, G-6, G-7, G-9, H-5, H-6

input panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

installing

ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

kiosk software suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 7-2

mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

remote device manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

RS-485 setup diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

signage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

intensity

backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

internet explorer, see IE

IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20, B-15

IPL . . . .8-3, F-1, F-7, G-1, G-3, G-4, G-5, G-6, G-7, G-9,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-5, H-6

IPL navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3

K

keyboard

virtual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

keycode values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

kiosk software suite

application overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 7-4

bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2, D-1

deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 7-2

loyalty card program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

price verification menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

scan a 2D bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 7-5

setting-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

slide show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

store operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

text messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

video message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

voicemail recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

kioskie.exe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

L

laser patterns

omnidirectional 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

lifecycle management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-20

loading fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

local reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

locating WLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

loyalty program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

M

Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 8-19

memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

memory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31, 8-10

messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 6-20

source code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

missed AP beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17

MK2200 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

mobile companion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3, B-5

setting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20

Mobility Services Platform Console (MSP), see RD Client

monitor upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-4

mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 2-2

MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 pole mount kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

recessed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Index - 4 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

wall mount kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

MSP, see RD Client

MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

object test page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

N

network disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

network security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

nonvolatile memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

NTP, see SNTP

numeric keypad operation

source code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

O

omnidirectional 1D pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

open system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

operating system upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4

options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

OS upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4

P

partition table upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6

parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

password

FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15, 3-27, 4-14, 8-7

PC card . . . . . 1-7, 3-23, 6-3, 8-10, 8-11, 8-16, G-1, G-4,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6, G-7, G-9, H-4, H-5

PCK

access cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

9100, 9140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 3-23, 6-3, 8-10, 8-11, 8-16,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4, G-6, G-7, H-5

access cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

tall symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Personal Computer Memory Card International

Association, see PC card

ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4, B-19

pin-outs

cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 power-over-ethernet 10-pin . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

RS-232 10-pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

RS-485 10-pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

playing video files

source code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Pocket Internet Explorer

browsing web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

PocketBrowser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

POE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

ports

ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Ethernet/Bias-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 2-15 headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 1-6 power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 1-6 powered RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-14, 2-16

RS-232 ext. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6, 2-14, 2-16

RS-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 2-11, 2-14, 2-16

power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5, 1-7, 2-7

options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 2-7

POE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 2-15

power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

power-over-ethernet, see POE

Price Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

price verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7, 7-7

printer

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 object test page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

ink cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

kiosk software suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 label stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 receipt stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

source code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 6-9

profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4

create new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5 delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5 edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5, B-6

program memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

programmable buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2, 6-4, 7-4

protected mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-4

Q

quick startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

R

radio card

antenna location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

installing and removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

radio signal transmission strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4

RAM memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11

rapid deployment client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi, C-1

raster pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-10

Index - 5

slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

RD Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi, C-1

launching the scan engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

rebooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

rebooting the MK2200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 8-9

recalibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29, G-10

regional settings

currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

remapping buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

remote device manager

configuration utility data entry formats . . . . . . . 4-27

DHCP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

downloading file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

enabling DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

filtering parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

modifying a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

monitoring remote devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

opening a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

restoring defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

saving a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

setting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

static IP addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

transferring configuration file . . . . . . . . . . 4-12, 4-13

updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

remote monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15, 8-3

remote reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

RF antenna location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

RF card

installing and removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

RS-232

connecting peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

pin-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 2-16

setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

RS-485

connection setup diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 2-12

wired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 2-12

S

save configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

scan beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

scan engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-1

source code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 7-5

scan mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 3-21

object test page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-1

tethered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18, 3-19, 3-21

updating firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-11

window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

scanning

2D bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

bar code scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

kiosk software suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 7-5

RD bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

scanning modes

commonly used scan patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 omnidirectional 1D pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 raster pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

smart raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

screen calibration . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 3-10, 3-24, 3-28, 3-29,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8, 8-10, G-10, H-3

screen saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

scripts

building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7 checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5 opening in TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

security overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23, 4-14, 8-2

Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii

setting

current time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

setting remote device manager options . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

settings

inactivity manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

setup

mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, I-1

wired ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Index - 6 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

wired ethernet AC outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

wired ethernet, power-over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

wired RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

wired RS-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

signal strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3, B-17

Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP

Simple Network Time Protocol, see SNTP

simplesaver program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26, 8-12

slab raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

sleep/wake-up time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

slide show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

smart raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

SMDKs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 for C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

for NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

for the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

PocketBrowser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

SNTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13, 3-26, 8-10

software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

software developer kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

PocketBrowser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

SMDK for C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

SMDK for NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

SMDK for the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

source code

alternative language support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

application version tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

automatic device startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

hiding browser toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 hiding the WinCE start bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

numeric keypad operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

playing video files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

scan engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 7-5

volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

source code index

advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 application version tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 custom kiosk IE error page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 device startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

four physical buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 magstripe reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 multi-media content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

scan engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

screen layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2, 1-6

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Spectrum24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

specular reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

splash screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

startup

options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

quick startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

static IP addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9, B-14

managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7, 4-20

setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20, B-14

status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4

storage memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

store operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

stylus properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-15

Symbol Mobility Developer Kits (SMDKs) . . . . . . . . . 1-7

symbologies

changing defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1

system configuration

default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

system menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 8-8, 8-10

T

TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 building hex image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1, F-7

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

creating script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5

defining properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4

error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8

file browser window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

hex image download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8

saving script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6

script window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2

tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7, F-3

technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

Terminal Configuration Manager, see TCM

tethered scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 3-18, 3-19, 3-21

text messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24, 3-28, 8-8

tracking user application version info . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-2, H-5

U

unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

update default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

updating data

flash screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3 monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3

OS partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3 partition table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3 platform partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

upgrade

command file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2, G-7

monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2, G-4

OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4

partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2

partition table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6

requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

user applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

V

versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18

video message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

virtual keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

virtual keycode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19, 7-10

response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

volatile memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

volume

beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 volume and sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 3-27

volume control

source code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

W

wait for completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

wake-up/sleep time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 6-2, 6-3, 7-3

Win CE desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

WINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

WLAN Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

WordPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Index - 7

Index - 8 MK2200 MicroKiosk for CE .NET 4.2 Product Reference Guide

Tell Us What You Think...

We’d like to know what you think about this Manual. Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to: (631) 738-3318, or mail to:

Symbol Technologies, Inc.

One Symbol Plaza M/S B-10

Holtsville, NY 11742-1300

Attention: Technical Publications Manager - Advanced Data Capture

IMPORTANT: If you need product support, please call the appropriate customer support number provided. Unfortunately, we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above.

Manual Title:___________________________________________

(please include revision level)

How familiar were you with this product before using this manual?

Very familiar Slightly familiar Not at all familiar

Did this manual meet your needs? If not, please explain.

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

What topics need to be added to the index, if applicable?

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

What topics do you feel need to be better discussed? Please be specific.

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

What can we do to further improve our manuals?

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

Thank you for your input—We value your comments.

Quick Startup Instructions

Installation Overview

- Mounting

- Cable pinout/COM port

Setup and Configuration

- Configuration Utility (browser start page, time, etc.)

- System Menu

- Loading Files

- FTP Server

- ActiveSync

- Printing

- Software Development Environments

- RF Communication Options

- RF Parameters such as ESSID Setup

- Security: Encryption/Authentication/Certificates

- Browser Apps: Hiding Toolbars/Network Disconnects

- Loading Fonts

- Time/Date

- SNMP/Remote Monitoring/MIB

Web Kiosk Software Suite

- Web Kiosk Software Suite Bar Codes

- Exiting the Software Suite/Accessing the CE Desktop

- Developer Source Code Index

Troubleshooting

- Accessing CE Desktop/Rebooting the MK2200

- How to configure the MK2200 for deployments

- Launching Applications

- Bullet-Proofing Web Applications

- Memory Management

- Securing Device from Electronic Hacking

- Life Cycle Management

2-2

2-2

to 2-6

2-14,

2-16

3-1

3-1, 3-1

, 3-5

3-5

, 8-8

5-1

3-23,

8-11

5-1

, 3-10

2-14, 3-20, 6-8, 7-13

9-1

, 8-1, 7-1, 6-1

B-1, 3-9, 1-1

B-1, B-15

B-1, B-7, B-12

3-6

,

3-18

,

6-23

,

8-13

,

8-14

8-15

3-11,

8-10

4-1, 4-16,

8-3

6-1

D-1

6-4

6-23

H-1

6-2, 8-7

3-1, 3-1

,

B-1

3-18,

3-22

, 6-25, 7-13

3-6, 3-15, 8-7, 8-13

,

8-14,

8-19

8-10

3-11, 3-15, 3-20, 3-23,

8-2

,

8-7

, 8-11

3-12,

3-20

Symbol Technologies, Inc.

One Symbol Plaza

Holtsville, New York 11742-1300 http://www.symbol.com

72E-87925-01

Revision A - August 2006

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents